Revit Architecture 2009

Imperial Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM03A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 . 159 . 164 . 171 . 177 . 181 . 181 . 184 . 187 . 189 . 192 . 197 . 197 . 201 . 205 . 208

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . 213 . 219 . 223 . 226 . 226 . 231 . 233 . 236 . 238 . 244 . 252 . 255 . 255 . 257 . 260 . 264 . 264 . 266 . 266

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 269 . 270 . 274 . 274 . 284 . 286 . 291 . 294 . 295

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . 302 . 309 . 313 . 314 . 317 . 319 . 323 . 324 . 324 . 325 . 327

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 343 . 349 . 349 . 351 . 351 . 355 . 361 . 361 . 363 . 365 . 366 . 372 . 373 . 373 . 374

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 . 398 . 405 . 409 . 413 . 417

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 418 . 421 . 425 . 430 . 431 . 434 . 436

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 . 438 . 439 . 441 . 443 . 444 . 445 . 446 . 446 . 449 . 450 . 450 . 453 . 453 . 454 . 460 . 460

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 . 465 . 466 . 469 . 472 . 473 . 475 . 477 . 478 . 482 . 484 . 487 . 490 . 497 . 498 . 505 . 509

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 531 . 542 . 544 . 544 . 547 . 550 . 553 . 554 . 555 . 558

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 . 563 . 568 . 571 . 573 . 576 . 578 . 580 . 581 . 584 . 592 . 592 . 594 . 595

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 . 610 . 616 . 618 . 622 . 622 . 624 . 627 . 630 . 630 . 633 . 634 . 637 . 640 . 644 . 646 . 650 . 655

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 . 659 . 667 . 671

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 674 . 674 . 677 . 680 . 680

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 . 684 . 691 . 695 . 697 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 716 . 719

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 . 724 . 724 . 728 . 732 . 735 . 740

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 . 746 . 756 . 763

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 . 778 . 787 . 790 . 792 . 795 . 795 . 797 . 801 . 802 . 803

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 809 . 811 . 813 . 814 . 817 . 817 . 821 . 823 . 826 . 831 . 833 . 834 . 837 . 837 . 838 . 843 . 845 . 848 . 849 . 851

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

2D and 3D view. quantities. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. and phases when you need it. For most tutorial projects. review the Revit Architecture templates. You learn the terminology. and schedules required for a building project.rte. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. schedules. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In this case. how to navigate the user interface. and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the parameter is one of association or connection. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. you will use the default template. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. 13 Click OK. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. scope. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. click Training Files. sections. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . drawing sheets. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. If you move the partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. hence. If the length of the elevation is changed. every drawing sheet. and open Imperial\Templates. and residential. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In the Revit Architecture model. and click Open. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. the operation of the software is parametric. 12 Select default. and customize the project as necessary. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. drawings. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. construction. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times.

dimensions. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. filled regions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. grids. For example. For example. Examples include detail lines.When you change something. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. doors. levels. For example. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. walls. They display in relevant views of the model. and 2D detail components. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. dimensions. and keynotes are annotation elements. They help to describe or document the model. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. tags. and cabinets are model components. tags. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. windows. If you can draw. programming is not required. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Understanding the Basics | 7 . windows. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. doors. and reference planes are datum elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and roofs are model elements.

for example. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.In Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. To place levels. floors. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. top of wall. However. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. families. section views. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Often. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. from geometry to construction data. Most often. views of the project. for example. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. and types. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and so forth). such as roofs. In other cases. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. By using a single project file. and ceilings. first floor. This information includes components used to design the model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. schedules. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit Architecture. The project file contains all information for the building design. and drawings of the design. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. or bottom of foundation. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. elevation views. you can explicitly control them. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . some terms are unique to Revit Architecture.

Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ceilings. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. and similar graphical representation. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. For example. floors. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. A type can also be a style. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. making it easy to understand what each button represents. However. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. roofs. For example.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. In the steps that follow. the user interface is labeled. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. System families include walls. In the following illustration. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. specifically its clear user interface. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. and levels. System families can be transferred between projects. identical use. categories of model elements include walls and beams. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. dimensions. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes.

By default. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New). The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. This creates a new project based on the default template. In addition.

The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example. and View. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. While working in the drawing area. Edit. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. you type the required key combination to perform the command. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. which are listed on the menu. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

When you select the Door tool. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. when you add a door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar. For example.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. a door type is specified. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 9 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project.

■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. In the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. select Views (all). 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. click the tab in the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.11 Click OK.

To open a view. and groups.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . families. walls. sheets. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. double-click its name. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and rename views. family category (doors. delete. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and group name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. schedules. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. elevations. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. reports. 3D). families. The browser is dockable. windows).

click Wall.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. After creating a browser organization scheme." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. Do not click. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. In this case. The cursor displays as a pencil. In the bottom left corner of the window. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Cancel.

it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. press F1 for context-sensitive help. find a keyword on the Index tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element.18 On the Design Bar. You can use this tri-pane. There are several tools that help you find information. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. press F1 for help. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. click Modify to end the Wall command. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Toolbar: From the toolbar. In the status bar. in conjunction with tooltips. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. In addition. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. If no Help button displays. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. You can also press SHIFT+F1. After you are familiar with these tasks. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. 20 Press TAB. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Click the Help button. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . and the topic specific to the dialog opens. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). The status bar also provides information. When you place the cursor over an element. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Windows: From any window. regarding selected elements in a view. click on the Standard toolbar.

rvt. In the following steps. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Training Files. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. the view zooms out from the building model. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. 5 On the View toolbar. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the drawing area. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.

. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 10 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the View toolbar. 7 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. As you move the mouse. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.

display along the ends. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. 15 To exit the wheel. and click the SteeringWheels tab. moving the wheel to the desired location. For more information about SteeringWheels. expand Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying a building model. and double-click 2nd Flr. and click Help. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 17 Type ZR. 18 Click and drag the left control. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. to lengthen the wall. called drag controls. bottoms. expand Views (all). zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls. To define settings for SteeringWheels.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. press ESC. as shown. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Small blue dots. These are the drag controls. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Cnst. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles.

22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. as shown. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . In this case. and click again to specify the ending position. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and on the Tools toolbar. The table moves down. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Some commands. for example.19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 23 Click next to the lower wall. you want to move the table closer to the wall. click (Move). click to specify the starting position.

In this example. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. and click again to end it. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Move. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. select the second item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Some commands. such as the Lines command. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click Lines. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. 24 Select the plant. 26 On the Undo menu. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

30 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar.29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . Press ESC twice.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. or referenced as a drafting view. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Use detail components to define an assembly. 27 . but for training purposes. In Revit Architecture. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. When you have finished these tutorials. detail. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. illustrating how building components work together. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. In this tutorial. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. and annotate building assemblies. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If necessary. create a reference callout. scroll until the folder is displayed. enter Window Head Detail. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. click Drafting View. and reference a drafting view. import a DWG detail. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. and click OK. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. for Name. 3 In the Scale list. you will create a drafting view.

and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 6 In the Colors field list. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. 10 In the drawing area. The model zooms out. displaying the extents of the detail. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . The drawing area is still blank.In the Project Browser. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. and click Open. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. as shown. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. select Black and White. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. 9 Type ZR. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. click Training Files.dwg.).

13 Click Reference other view. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. select Detail View: Detail. 14 In the drawing area. to activate the view selection list. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the Type Selector. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail.The view displays to the specified area. click Callout. and in the Scale list.

and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.rvt. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. adjust the detail view display settings. double-click the reference callout tag head. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. in the Type Selector. 2 On the Options Bar.The reference callout is created. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. select Callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. and in the Scale list. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . you will create a detail view defined by a callout.

under Detail Views (Detail). double-click Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Detail Views(Detail).The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Rename. enter Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0. for Name. 6 In the drawing area. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips.

This is the view crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line.

The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 16 Click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click. select As Underlay. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. and click OK. for Display Model. under Graphics. 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 14 In the drawing area. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. and click View Properties.

Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. Stud. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. on the Options Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . If the crop region is enlarged. type 1' 6''. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. Directly above the drawing area. and press ENTER. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 19 In the Type Selector. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Components. typical details can easily be placed.Brick on Mtl. By grouping detail components. 20 In the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

23 Using the same method. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. expand Groups ➤ Detail. add the following detail components as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. as shown. and click Create Instance. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. click Modify to end the command.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail.

select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. in the type selector. click Training Files. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. click Browse. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. and verify that Horizontal. c_express_workshop_details_start. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. In the next exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can customize this list.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. Leader. or instructions within a construction documentation package.rvt. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Full Path. map keynotes by material.txt. and under Keynote Table. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. For more information about customizing a keynote database. and Free End are selected. and format keynote styles. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 4 On the Options Bar. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. special notes.

8 Click to place the tag.5 In the drawing area. Keynoting | 39 .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 9 Press ESC to end the command. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. Either move the text inside. 7 Click to place the leader arm. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. a question mark displays. If no value has been specified.

draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 16 In the drawing area. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click to place the tag. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. click Keynote ➤ Material.

Boxed. 17 On the Options Bar. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). legends. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Click OK. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. 19 In the Type Selector. Select Keynote Tags. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Only the keynotes remain selected. Click Check None.All items within the selection display in red.

you will create a sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. In this exercise. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Update drawing sheet and project information.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. In this lesson. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. Place views on drawing sheets. update the project information element properties. this tutorial uses imperial units only. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Add labels to a title block.

accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area.rvt. scroll until the folder is displayed. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. click Training Files. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In Revit Architecture. In the Project Browser. If necessary. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 3 Click OK. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or in the element properties of the title block.

click Modify to clear the selection. hold down the wheel and drag. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. Smith and press ENTER. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. enter Sections/Details. 6 In the Title Block. Click OK. 5 In the drawing area. double-click Checker. 7 Enter K. roll the wheel. In this tutorial. 9 In the Project Browser. To pan. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. and click Rename. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. right-click A602 .4 Type ZR. under Sheets(all). Then. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter A602. For Name. To zoom in and out. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.Unnamed. you can enter ZE to zoom out. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.

Smith. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. select Text : 1/8''.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 Click OK. The Family Editor opens. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. enter 4/10/2008. enter Design Development. click Text. For Client Name. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. 20 Click and type Project Status. enter Freighthouse Flats. 16 Type ZR. 15 In the Options Bar. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . select the title block. enter J. For Project Name. 17 On the Design Bar. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. (Left) is selected. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. For Project Status. 18 On the Options Bar.

46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Label. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar.21 On the Design Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. click (Load into Project). as shown. in the Type Selector. add Project Issue Date parameter. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown. select Label : 3/16''. 29 On the Design Bar. and click. and click OK. 22 Using the same method. to add 28 Using the same method. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and verify that (Top) are selected. click Modify to exit the command. 23 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only.

by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet.Project. for Name. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. you will create. click Training Files. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. click Browse. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. In this exercise. to a drawing sheet. and under Keynote Table. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. for Full Path. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. Next you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . enter Keynote Legend . select Override parameter values of existing types. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. a viewport displays. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and click Yes. place and modify a keynote legend.30 In the Reload Family dialog.txt. representing the view or schedule. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet.

and click OK.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Sections/Details. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. under Text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 8 In the Project Browser. as shown. under Sheets (all). and drag Keynote Legend . 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Legends. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 . on the Appearance tab. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. clear Show Headers.

9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.Project as shown. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. The keynote legend is visible. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .

for View Name.Project. enter Keynote Legend . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 15 In the Project Browser. for Filter.Sheet. and click OK. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 19 Click OK twice. expand Detail Views (Detail). not keynotes. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. click Edit. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Properties. select Filter by sheet. under Legends. as shown. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. right-click Keynote Legend . The Keynote Legend is now blank. and click OK.

double-click A0 . The view title with line displays below the viewport. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet 1. The view remains selected. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 .The keynote legend is automatically updated. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. as shown. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. under Sheets (all).

by default.When you place a view on a sheet. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Type ZR. or omit view titles from sheets. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can specify text attributes for view titles. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. as shown. Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the drawing list. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. expand Schedules/Quantities. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . define the information to include in a view title. 5 In the Project Browser. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. As part of a construction document set. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. The drawing list remains selected.

clear Appears In Drawing List. and click OK. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them.Sections/Details and select A801 . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. including only sheets that contain views. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . The drawing list display is updated.Ceiling Plans. while pressing SHIFT. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click the selected sheets. and click Properties. under Identity Data. select A602 . under Sheets (all). You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

a curtain wall. it is good practice to test the constraints. For example. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. As you develop the building design. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. a central service core. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. If the grid moves. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. 57 . you learn how to use parametric design techniques.

After the beginning exercises. levels. under Projects. notice four elevation markers.rte. construction. and click Browse. To create the project file. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. West. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. In practice. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. In the drawing area in the right pane. you load any required family type that is not in your project. and open Imperial\Templates\default. click Training Files. 3 Under Template file. verify that the second option is selected. Creating the Project In this exercise. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. and settings. you use a template that is provided with the software. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. you will use the default template. The project is stored as a single file. The new project opens. For this project. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. under Create new. 5 Click OK. and customize the project as necessary. and residential. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. but contains no geometry. views. from the product library. you design inside the elevation markers. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. South. East. with an RVT extension. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click New. such as a door or window. In views that display elevation markers. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial.

duplicate them. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. You can add. Ceiling Plans. double-click Imperial. Schedules/Quantities. heights. 7 If necessary. As you design and document your building model. then expand Floor Plans. These views are customizable: you can rename them. and elevation views created in the project by the template. the view you see in the drawing area. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. sheets. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation).Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. 8 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and duplicate levels. change their properties. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. will be accessible from the Project Browser. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. as well as change their names. display in the south elevation. Creating the Project | 59 . created by the template. delete. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. expand Views (all). double-click South. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 13 In the file window. such as schedules and legends. content and building model reports. locate the Project Browser. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and delete them. and other properties. enter Revit Retail Building. Groups. Sheets (all). 14 For File name. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Families. and click Training Files. notice the Legends. and families in your project. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. Two level lines. schedules. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. reflected ceiling plan views. 10 In the Project Browser.

17 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. and press ENTER. enter 00 Foundation. You change the names of the 2 default levels. When you begin designing. and windows within the building model. so that when one level moves. you will want to save your work frequently. 16 Click Save. the other levels move and change with it. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. and double-click South. to each other. expand Views (all). 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line.rvt) is selected. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Adding Project Levels on page 60. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. verify that Project Files (*. and on the General tab. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You learn how the levels are locked. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. doors. After you modify the two default levels. or constrained. view the Save reminder interval. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building.15 For Save as type.

right-click. 13 On the Options Bar. and then move it up. This is the Options Bar. and press ENTER. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. view the Design Bar. enter 0'. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 16 Enter 12'-6''. By default. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 14 Click Plan View Types. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. When you add the new level. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. which should display by default. If it does not. enter 01 Entry Level.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and click OK. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and click Basics. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. Next.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. click Level. 12'-6'' above 01 Entry Level. 5 In the Project Browser. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. enter -6'. As you move the cursor. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. and press ENTER. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. not all the tabs are visible. and press ESC. click to specify the endpoint of the level line.

enter 12'-6''. click Level. click Modify to end the command. If you create a level by copying it. and enter 02 Level. under Floor Plans. using a different option. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and rename the corresponding views. 25 Click to place the level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. click (Pick Lines). 26 Press ESC. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option.18 In the Project Browser. or on the Design Bar. 12'-6'' above the 02 Level line. and move it slightly upward. add 3 levels 12’-6” apart above 03 Level. and for Offset. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. right-click Level 3. you add another level. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Rename. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 19 Click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Next.

Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. If you select a level and click its lock. and you can move them independently. the levels are no longer constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. all the levels move. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Notice that by moving the top level. as shown. Adding Project Levels | 63 .

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. so that if the roof elevation changes. When the grid is complete.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. the column height changes as well. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. double-click 00 Foundation. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Modify. On the Design Bar. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. In a later exercise. Move the cursor up. under Floor Plans. and specify the grid line endpoint. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select (Draw). click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. In the following exercise. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design.

and click to place the line. click Grid. Click to place the grid line. enter 25'. and press ENTER. and for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and click to place the line. click (Pick Lines). enter 25'. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and click to place the line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. for Offset. Next. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 15'. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D.

add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click Dimension. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 25' and 15'. On the Options Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid. click (Aligned). 14 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.8 Press ESC. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0'. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Grid. 11 On the Design Bar.

select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. Two pins display on the grid lines. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click Modify. 24 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. By pinning these central grid lines. 21 Press ESC twice. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ESC. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. If necessary. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. 18 On the Design Bar. until it is closer to grid line A. and select grid line A. ■ Creating a Column Grid | 67 . At the left endpoint of the grid line.15 Starting with grid line A. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. until it is closer to grid line 5. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click and drag the blue circular grip up. and press ESC. The pins are hidden. select grid lines C and 3. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line.

34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select grid line 5. click Edit/New. click . and on the Options Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click OK twice. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 26 In the drawing area. click Modify. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click Modify. enter 2''. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 1/4'' Bubble with Gap. and click OK. (Element Properties). The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. click the value for Center Segment. 36 On the Design Bar. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 29 In the Name dialog. and select None. 31 For End Segments Length. click Duplicate. 33 On the Design Bar.

and press ESC.37 Select the grid lines again. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 43 Press ESC. 47 Enter 18'. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select all of the grid lines. and in the Type Selector. click Structural Column. click Finish. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x49. For Place By. select grid line A. 45 While pressing CTRL. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. and press ENTER. select Grid : 1/4'' Bubble. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. click (Grid Intersection). Creating a Column Grid | 69 . click Activate Dimensions. The original continuous grid lines are restored. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. and on the Options Bar. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 46 On the Options Bar. and unlock it.

under Floor Plans. Next. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns.48 On the Standard toolbar. click Camera. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and click to place the target point of the camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. for From. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. select 01 Entry Level. If it is unlocked. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lock it. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

Adding Beams on page 72. Right-click 3D View 1. displays in bold under 3D Views. under Views (all). you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and click OK. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Beams In this exercise. expand 3D Views. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. The current view. named 3D View 1 by default. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. enter To Building. and click Rename.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. In the Rename View dialog.

When you finish adding beams. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. the icon on the right side of the scale. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Beams | 73 . select each grid line. verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. 8 While pressing CTRL. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Beam. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. click (Create Beam On Grid). view the icons on the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. The view is currently set to Coarse.

click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 14 Select one of the beams. 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click (Default 3D View). and click Select All Instances.The selected grid lines display as red. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Finish. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. 12 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red.

press and hold SHIFT. and click Select All Instances. All of the columns display as red. select 02 Level.17 In the Select Levels dialog. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. and click Element Properties. view the Top Level parameter. 06 Roof. under Instance Parameters. right-click. right-click. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. select 06 Roof. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and click OK. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. When you created the columns. (Element Properties). under Constraints. click 24 Press ESC. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 22 On the Options Bar. which only extend to the 5th level. Adding Beams | 75 . 21 With the column selected. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. for Top Level. 20 Click Cancel. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select 06 Roof.

and if necessary.25 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. Because the Model Graphics Style is Hidden Line and the Detail Level is Coarse. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . resize the view to see the entire structure. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. double-click South. under Elevations. the structural elements display only as lines.

you create 8 framing elevation views. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. click Framing Elevation. 3 On the Options Bar. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.27 Save the drawing. Adding Braces on page 77. To better add the braces to the structure. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.

double-click the elevation marker arrow. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. The associated framing elevation view displays. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. and press ESC to end the command. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

verify that W-Wide Flange: W12x26 is selected. but when placed the braces are placed.6 Select the crop region (if necessary). so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 7 On the Design Bar. click Brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and when the endpoint snap displays. 8 In the Type Selector. click to specify the start point of the brace. Adding Braces | 79 . 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level.

NOTE Do not copy or array braces. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .11 Using the same technique. delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. enter 59'. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. After you add the final brace. and press ENTER. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. press ESC twice. Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. The height of the roof lowers.

under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. enter 33'. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. Adding Braces | 81 . but this time add them from right to left. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click 00 Foundation. 14 On the Standard toolbar. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.

25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 80'. NOTE As you add braces. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. under Elevations. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and press ENTER. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 19 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. as shown in the 3D view below. double-click 00 Foundation. and on the Options Bar. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. under Floor Plans.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. click Activate Dimensions. 21 Select grid line A. enter 35'.

32 Proceed to the next exercise.Test connectivity of the columns. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation on page 83. double-click 00 Foundation. click and roof height. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. After you load the pile cap family. and drag it away from the structure. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. grid size. Before you can add the pile caps. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and how to load specific families into a project. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and if necessary. Creating a Foundation | 83 . Creating a Foundation In this exercise. beams. under Floor Plans. 31 Save the drawing. under Floor Plans. lock it. double-click 00 Foundation. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay.

expand Families. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. Click OK twice.rfa. and expand Structural Foundations. In the View Range dialog. The Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click Training Files. under View Depth. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. When the final pile cap is placed. A warning displays. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and open Imperial\Families\Structural\Foundations\Pile Cap-Rectangular. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. The foundation pile cap now displays. and click View Properties. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag it to the drawing area. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Expand Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). click Edit. The pile cap has been added in the view.2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Extents. and press ESC twice. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. select Unlimited. for View Range. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select 81'' x 81'' x 36''. and click Create Similar. 9 Close the warning dialog. press ESC twice. for Level.

beams. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. under 3D Views. and open Imperial\i_RRB_update_structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. click Training Files. and braces that you used to create the building structure. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.rvt. beam. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and brace families into the project. you change the types of the columns.13 In the Project Browser. You load new column.

double-click {3D}. and click Select All Instances. 7 On the Design Bar. select HSS-Round Hollow Structural Section-Column:HSS20X.0500. right-click. under 3D Views. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 6 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. The building model displays the round hollow columns. 2 Select one of the columns.Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. All columns in the building model display as red. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section:HSS8X4X. 4 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .625. click Brace. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. select Round Bar: 1''. 3 In the Type Selector. right-click. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.

select Round Bar: 3''. 17 While pressing CTRL.rvt. and click OK. for Type. click Modify. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. but it is the only size of its type currently available. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the Round Bar: 1'' bar type. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. double-click Elevation 1-a. 18 In the Type Selector. and open Imperial\i_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. The brace type changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.This not the size that you want to use. under Dimensions. After the files are linked. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to Round Bar: 3''. click Duplicate. click (Element Properties). the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. click (Default 3D View). and changing its size parameter. enter 3''. click Training Files. 16 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 10 On the Options Bar. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Modify. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 In the Name dialog. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. click Edit/New. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. enter 3''. for d. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar.

4 In the Project Browser. click (Copy/Monitor). 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Tools toolbar. and click Select Link. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. In this case. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. select the linked Revit model. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt.Origin to Origin. under Elevations. double-click South. Grids. 3 Under Positioning. depending on the project. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. structural members. select Auto . The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects.Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. and click Open. select i_RRB_structure_complete. however. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 6 In the drawing area. click Copy. After the link is established.

Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. for Floor Plan views.8 On the Options Bar. delete the Level 2 floor plan. and click Delete. select Levels 00 through 06. click Finish mode. 15 In the New Plan dialog. under Floor Plans. click Finish. right-click Level 1. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 13 On the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. while pressing SHIFT. click OK. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 18 Using the same method. 10 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 16 Click OK. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 9 In the drawing area.

Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click OK. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. enter Floor Plans.Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. right-click. 20 In the drawing area. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. First. for Name. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. double-click 00 Foundation. 19 In the Project Browser. select the Topography : Surface. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 21 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.

31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Names. under Floor Plans. click Camera. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . and click OK. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible.25 In the View Templates dialog. click OK. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. double-click Site. select Floor Plans. 34 In the 3D view that displays.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter To Building. Adding Floors on page 92. 36 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. expand 3D Views. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1.35 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Adding Floors In this exercise. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.

and railings are also created from sketches. select the top floor line. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_floors. stairs. click Floor. such as roofs.rvt. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. and elements in the current view display as gray. In this exercise. Move the cursor to the left. Some other Revit Architecture elements. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the Sketch tab. At the top left corner of the grid. On the Options Bar. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps.To create floors. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Adding Floors | 93 . sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. If the grid changes size. click Dimension. past the first vertical grid line. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Leave this dimension unlocked. and then the first horizontal grid line. click Lines. click (Rectangle). 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You are now in the Sketch Editor. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window.

At the top left corner of the grid. select the top floor line. and click the temporary dimension value. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Do not lock the dimension. press ENTER. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and change their values to 1'. and then press ESC. click Modify.4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Move the cursor to the left dimension. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select and lock the dimensions. Enter 1'. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 1'.

click Quit Sketch. 8 Select the floor. enter 5'. using a different sketching technique. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. On the Sketch tab. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. on the Design Bar. and for Offset. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. ■ Adding Floors | 95 . click Floor. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. under Floor Plans. Select the three remaining floor lines. click (Pick Lines). double-click 02 Level.7 On the Design Bar. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. Next. On the Options Bar. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. and press ESC. They display on the floor sketch. click Edit. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown, and lock the dimensions.

13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Level. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 16 On the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Sketch tab, click Lines. 18 On the Options Bar, click (Rectangle).

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level, and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively, you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level, and lock the edges. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.

Adding Floors | 97

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 33 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 35 On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 98.

Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.

98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_roof.rvt.

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar:

Clear Defines slope. Click (Pick Lines).

■ ■

For Offset, enter 6', and press ENTER.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

Adding a Roof | 99

6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the blue dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.

7 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 1'. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines:
■ ■

On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep), and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area, select the roof.

Adding a Roof | 101

14 On the Options Bar, click

(Add new points to the slab shape).

15 On the Options Bar, for Elevation, enter -4'', and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

17 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.

Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof, on grid D, move the cursor down below the roof, and click to specify the section.

102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

20 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.

23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 06 Roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. In section, you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view, select the roof, and on the Options Bar, click 27 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Structure [1], select Variable. (Element Properties).

Adding a Roof | 103

The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 30 Click OK 3 times. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan, select the section line, and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog, click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Add swept fascias

36 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

37 If necessary, on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 38 In the 3D view, zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. In this case, the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector, select Fascia - Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 41 Starting with the left front edge, moving counter-clockwise, select each edge.

104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Curtain Wall on page 105.

Adding a Curtain Wall
In this exercise, you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid, so if you resize the grid, the curtain wall resizes with it.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 105

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.

Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront, and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. When you duplicate a type, you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. The type is saved in the project. 6 In the Name dialog, enter Retail Storefront, and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

(Element Properties).

Under Construction, for Join Condition, select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 7'. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern, for Spacing, enter 3’ 6''. Click OK twice.

8 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Level, select 01 Entry Level. For Height, select 05 Roof Garden. For Offset, enter 2'.

106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays, click to place the first curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 2' from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend), and trim each curtain wall segment.

13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. These dimensions are not in a sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimensions, but opt to keep the constraints when prompted.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Adding a Curtain Wall | 107

15 On the View Control Bar, verify the view settings:
■ ■

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Entrance on page 108.

Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.

Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels, you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All. All the elements in the list are selected. 4 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None. 5 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters. 6 Click OK.

Creating an Entrance | 109

7 Zoom in to the entrance area, in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

8 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 9 Select 1 panel, press and hold CTRL, and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.

10 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

11 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 12 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 13 In the Apply View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK. 14 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 15 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Medium. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this case an architectural elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building.

Creating an Entrance | 111

19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South. 20 Zoom to the front of the building. 21 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.

22 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.

23 On the Options Bar, click Add or Remove Segments. 24 Select the mullion that you selected previously, select another mullion to the right, and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model

select One Segment. select Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. Creating an Entrance | 113 . 32 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 29 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. 27 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.25 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. and unpin it. 30 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 31 In the Type Selector.

and view the new entrance. 35 Zoom in to the first panel. open the North elevation. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 3rd. 38 Using the same process. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. select it. 34 Zoom in to the front of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 114. 37 Press DELETE. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. 36 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. click (Default 3D View). 39 Optionally. press TAB until it is selected. and 4th panels. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.33 On the View toolbar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click OK. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level. 3 Right-click in the view.rvt. for Underlay. double-click 01 Entry Level. and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties.

which indicates you must draw the callout. and click to complete the callout.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. click Callout. 8 Select the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. select the grip closest to the callout head.

under Floor Plans. 12 Draw a section line. enter Display Area. and click Rename. and click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . and click Flip Section. Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. as shown.9 In the Project Browser. 14 Press ESC. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. right-click. 13 Select the section line.

expand Sections (Building Section). under Floor Plans. enter Section Display Area. and click Rename. select Finish Face: Exterior. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser.16 Select the section box. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 21 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. For Loc Line. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 17’ x 17’ square wall inside the grid lines. right-click Section 1. 17 In the Project Browser. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. Click (Rectangle). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Wall.5 1/2'' Partition (1 hr). 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Basic Wall: Interior . and click OK.

click Dimension. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. click (Align). and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector.) Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . select Wall faces. and lock the dimension.24 On the Tools toolbar. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 25 Press ESC twice. click Ceiling. 27 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Compound Ceiling: 2’ x 2’ ACT System. for Prefer. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. under Ceiling Plans. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. double-click 01 Entry Level. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. Lock both alignments.

click Modify. enter 9'. for Base Offset. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. double-click Section Display Area. 41 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and click (Element Properties). under Sections. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. click 43 On the Design Bar. enter 9'. and click OK. and click OK. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. for Height Offset From Level. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Section Display Area. 38 On the View Control Bar. 46 Press ESC. Next. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click to select it. 37 In the Project Browser.36 Press ESC twice. under Ceiling Plans. under Constraints. under Sections (Building Section). (Element Properties). 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and click to select the walls.

49 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. under Construction. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Ceiling Plans. view the ceiling structure. for Type. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Top/Base. click Edit. and click to select the walls. for Structure. and press ESC.48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . click Edit/New. On the Options Bar.

54 Click OK. click Cancel. click Cancel. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click (Rotate). 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 123 .60 Click. 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER. enter 45.

click Shadows On. double-click To Building. 67 Proceed to the next exercise.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Optionally. 65 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 125. 64 On the View Control Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and copy it to the 05 Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_stair. and click to create a reference plane to the right.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to create a reference plane to the left. click Training Files. and for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor over grid line B. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. under Floor Plans. enter 5'. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. double-click 01 Entry Level.

click Stairs. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. C. and specify a point to create first stair flight. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 7 Using the same method. and 3. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. shorten the right reference plane.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 2. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 Select the left reference plane.

with a message that 22 risers have been created and 0 remain. beyond the end of the stair. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. The complete stair displays. click Wall. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. including its handrails. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. select Basic Wall: Generic . and specify a point.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. select Finish Face: Interior. 10 On the Options Bar. Click (Rectangle).8'' Masonry. ■ Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . Move the cursor down. 12 In the Type Selector. and select the 2nd reference plane.

16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. and lock the alignment. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to select it. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 15 On the Tools toolbar. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 18 Using the same technique. click Align.14 Draw walls around the stair.

and specify a point away from the wall. select both reference planes. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. Select the bottom of the stair. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . for Prefer. (Undo). and press ENTER. enter 4'. Select the wall. 25 While pressing CTRL. Lock the dimension. 21 Select the dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Because the dimension is constrained. Select the interior face of the wall. click Door. 23 Select the stair. 24 On the Standard toolbar. TIP To flip the door swing. select Wall faces.20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. The stair and walls move to the left. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. select Single-Flush : 36'' x 84''. select the dimension value. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 28 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. a warning displays. Click Modify. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. and press DELETE. 27 In the Type Selector.

Click OK. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Element Properties). 33 Select the stair. (SteeringWheels). 35 On the View toolbar. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. Click OK. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). but if you view the top level of the building. click Modify.30 On the Design Bar. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. and move the cursor to spin the building model. select all 4 walls. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. for Base Constraint. click 36 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). select 05 Roof Garden. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. select 00 Foundation. for Multistory Top Level.

46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and lock the alignment. click Align. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 131 . under Floor Plans. and lock the alignments. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. double-click 01 Entry Level. 44 On the Tools toolbar. 40 Zoom in to the stairs.38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. (Rectangle). 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.

■ 58 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. By offsetting the base. for Base Offset. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. on the View toolbar. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Default 3D View). click see the roof. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. (SteeringWheels). 56 Select the shaft.Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. enter 1'. click 59 On the View toolbar. 55 In the Project Browser. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). click (Default 3D View). 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. For Top Constraint.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise.61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 133. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

and open Imperial\i_RRB_wall_profile. 5 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 06 Roof. 7 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. and then select the right face of the wall. The exact placement is not important.8'' Masonry. and click OK. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. for Underlay. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.rvt. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. click Training Files. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Align). Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Basic Wall: Generic . 2 Right-click in the view. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.

and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 11 In the Go To View dialog.Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and click Open View. 17 On the Options Bar. and click (Fillet arc). select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. 20 Draw a circle with a 4' radius just below the fillet arc. 18 In the upper right corner of the profile. click Lines. 15 In the error dialog. click Remove Constraints. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. enter 32' 6''. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. as shown: Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 135 . click . and click (Circle). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. click . and on the Options Bar. select Elevation: South. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the 12' 6'' vertical dimension value. click Edit Profile.

23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D}. under 3D Views.

as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 137. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RRB_host. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. TIP After you place the 1st planter.rvt. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. click Component. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. between grid lines C and D. 3 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. select Planter : 48'' x 48''. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

under Floor Plans. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 17 While pressing CTRL. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. click Edit/New. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Apply. 11 Select one of the trees.Deciduous: Japanese Cherry .15'. select RPC Tree . for Type.5 On the Basics tab. under Dimensions. 14 In the Name dialog. enter Japanese Cherry 5'. select RPC Tree Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 5'. enter 5'. as shown. 6 In the Type Selector. and click OK. for Height. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Component. select the 2 remaining trees. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Default 3D View). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. View the roof. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 8 On the View toolbar. (Element Properties). and then click OK twice. and press ESC twice. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and in the Type Selector.

18 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 21 On the Design Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Lines. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . and click to place the line. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter 8'. click Floor. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 8' below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. For Offset. 25 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.

29 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. 32 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 3'. 28 Select the right vertical floor line.26 On the Options Bar. enter 0'. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. 30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Draw). and click to sketch a line. for Offset. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. move the cursor to the right approximately 4'. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line.

The completed sidewalk displays. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Trim/Extend). and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . 35 Select the line between grid lines A and B.33 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 36 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.

Next. as shown: (Element Properties). RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 38 Select the sidewalk. In plan view. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 45 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 47 In the Type Selector. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. select RPC Male: Alex. When you render an image. and click so he is facing the column. 50 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Duplicate. under Constraints. 41 In the Name dialog. 42 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sidewalk. near Column E5. and on the Options Bar. click Component. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 49 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. click 40 In the Type Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. 48 On the Options Bar. a photorealistic image displays. for Height Offset from Level. for Type. enter -0' 6''. 44 Click OK. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. about 30 degrees. 53 In the Type Selector. 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 143 . 52 Move the cursor clockwise. 55 Press ESC twice.NOTE If necessary. select RPC Female: Cathy. select RPC Beetle. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 54 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click to place her on the sidewalk.

and on the Options Bar. click the car. Next. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 59 In the Project Browser. Select a host for the RPC components 61 Select Cathy. for Offset. under Elevations. enter -1'. click Camera. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a host for a component. 57 In the camera view (3D View 1). double-click West.56 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. click Pick Host. 60 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and click (Element Properties). and click OK. under Constraints. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. click Pick Host. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. View the front of the building 66 In the Project Browser. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and replace them with a service core.62 Click the sidewalk. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 63 Select Alex. 64 Click the sidewalk. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. If the sidewalk changes height. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 145. 65 Using the same method.

and open Imperial\i_RRB_add_service_core_. and shaft opening. 3 Select the entire stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 05 Roof Garden.rvt. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. including the stairs. After the service core is positioned. walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser.

click (Default 3D View). you delete the entire stairwell. and open Imperial\i_RRB_core. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. click 6 On the View toolbar.rvt. (SteeringWheels). Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.4 Press DELETE. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 147 . 5 On the View toolbar. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click Training Files. click OK. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden.

and click Create Instance. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. and notice that the linked file is listed. expand Model. 14 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the linked instance. Click the inner top horizontal floor line. under Floor Plans. right-click i_RRB_core. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser.Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. click 16 Align the core: ■ ■ (Align). expand Groups. and on the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2.

click (top down view). click 21 On the View toolbar. 18 Select the core. or if the group layout is expected to change. (Default 3D View). 17 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Click grid line C. 20 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 149 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and on the Options Bar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. (SteeringWheels). and click to align the center. click Modify. click Modify. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Ungroup.

2 In the left pane of the dialog. After you modify it. expand Renderings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. where it is hosted within a railing family. click Training Files. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 150. click Training Files. in the Project Browser. and double-click Lounge Perspective. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The rendering displays. and open Imperial\i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. 3 In the Conference project. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building.rvt.22 Proceed to the final exercise. This is the railing that you want to add to your model.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Conference. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and expand Railings. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 2' to the left of grid line C. under Floor Plans. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Handrail only. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and on the Options Bar. expand Families. verify that Chain is not selected. click Modify. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Level. click (Split). 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and on the Options Bar. 7 Click Window menu ➤ i_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. click Edit. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and select Glass. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. click OK. The floor sketch displays. and Parapet.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click to split the floor. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. press and hold CTRL. 5 Expand Railing.

and click to place it. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the alignment. and click to draw another line. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. click (Align). 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click (Align). and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically 5'. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 27 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 5' long.19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Select grid line B. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 26 Select grid line D. move the cursor horizontally to the right 5'. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown.

Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Glass. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Railing Properties. 30 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown.rvt project. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 153 .29 On the Design Bar. click Railing. enter 4''. For Offset. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. click Dimension. Lock the dimensions. 31 In the Revit dialog. for Type. and click OK.

39 Click Finish Sketch. 154 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. click Camera.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 155 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

156 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

NOTE For training purposes. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. slight modifications to the building design have been made. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. exterior fire stairs. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. balconies. and a roof garden. 157 . lofty ceilings.

158 .

Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. 159 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. including plan. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. elevation. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. how to create section and elevation views. you learn how to create views from a building model. section. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 161 . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser.

under Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. double-click Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Project Browser.

Duplicating Plan Views | 163 . 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click 1''= 80'-0''. click the current scale. Next.14 On the View Control Bar.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .16 Right-click.

Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. select Elevation: Building Elevation. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . for Scale.rvt. select 1/8''=1'-0''. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify.

under Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 167 . click Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 14 In the Type Selector. for Scale. enter South East. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. select Section: Building Section. double-click South East. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. select 1/8''=1'-0''. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. expand Floor Plans. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. under Views (all).

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

Click the midpoint of the section line. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 169 .

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. expand Sections (Building Section). select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View Control Bar. using the blue circular drag grip. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. click Modify.

25 On the Design Bar. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 171 . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify.

under Floor Plans. click Callout. select Floor Plan. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Resulting callout view .Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.rvt.

6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Creating Callout Views | 173 . Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Modify.

click Modify. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 9 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

double-click Section 1. Creating Callout Views | 175 . select Detail View: Detail. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. for Scale. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. under Sections (Building Sections). 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 177 . Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head.

Custom. double-click Level 1. select the section line. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 For Section Tag. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. enter Section Head – Custom. click Edit/New. select Custom-Section Head. select the current project.rfa. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and click OK. for Section Head. select Section Head . 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files.Filled. click Load into Project. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and can be applied to the section line. 10 On the floor plan. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Section Tail . 4 On the Design Bar. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear any others. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Section Tail – Filled.rvt. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click OK. . open Imperial\Families\Annotations.

. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Circle. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. for Elevation Tag. scroll to Section Line. Click OK. 17 Under Category. and on the Options Bar. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 179 . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. For Line Weight. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 27 Click OK twice. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. scroll to Section Marks. select Custom-Callout Head. For Dimensions ➤ Width. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. On the floor plan. select 3/4'' Circle. click Training Files. On the floor plan. enter 3/4''. select 3. and click OK. and select 3. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Under Category. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 3/4'' Circle. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog. and click Open. 19 Click OK.rfa. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click Edit/New. and select 2. click the Annotation Objects tab. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape.

and click OK. 34 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. for Callout Tag. 40 Press ESC. For Corner Radius. select the callout. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Load into Project. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. and on the Options Bar. click the Annotation Objects tab. enter 1/4''. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog.30 On the Design Bar. and select 7. Click OK. select the current project. clear all others. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 36 In the drawing. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. . Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. and click OK. 39 Click OK twice. 43 Under Category. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down to Callout Boundary.

The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 46 Under Category. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. Creating a View Template In this exercise. 49 Click OK. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. expand Callout Boundary. and select 4. view regions. select Dash. and visual overrides. filters. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 181 . you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. To accomplish this.45 For Line Pattern. and apply it to multiple elevation views.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Training Files. You learn to create view templates. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. masking regions.

8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Entourage.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The crop region displays as red. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom to Fit. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click East. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. 5 On the View Toolbar. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar.

Creating a View Template | 183 . right-click East. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. elevation markers. 16 In the Project Browser. 15 In the View Templates dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. double-click North. and click Create View Template From View. under Elevations. levels. grids.10 Under Visibility. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 14 In the New View Template dialog. 12 On the View Control bar. and click OK. click OK. Callouts.

Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Apply. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Floor Plans. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 19 Using the same method. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.rvt. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. right-click North. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. edit the crop region as before. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click Penthouse.

Under View Depth. select Level Below (Level 4). select Level Below (Level 4). for Bottom. select Penthouse. right-click. under Extents. double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. for View Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. View Range and Plan Regions | 185 . Click OK twice. for Level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit.2 In the Project Browser.

click Plan Region. click Edit. for Level. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region.6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. and click Properties. 10 On the Design Bar. select Roof Plan. right-click. select Level 4. under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Bottom. for View Range. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Lines.

17 On the Design Bar. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 187 .11 On the Options Bar. Click OK twice. In the left corner of the building. Move you cursor diagonally. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Extents. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Under View Depth. for View Range. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. for Bottom. in this case. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. click Region Properties. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. for Level.

17 Using the same method. 7 In the Filters dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. After you apply the filter. and apply a color. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 11 Select Rated Walls. under Basic colors. for Pattern. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.rating of the walls. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Filters tab. click Edit/New. click (New). and click OK. Select contains. 12 On the Filter tab. under Views (all).rvt. select Fire Rating. select the red color. click Override under Patterns. for Color. Enter Hr. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. and click OK. for Rated Walls. select Solid Fill. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 10 On the Filter tab. enter Rated Walls. and double-click Level 1. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Add. under Filters. under Projection/Surface. under Categories. click <No Override>. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Walls. 14 In the Color dialog. 9 Click OK. 16 Click OK.

The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Remove.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. and click OK. To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View | 189 .

4 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. right-click. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 2 Select Copy of Level 1.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Show Crop Region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. as shown. 5 On the View menu. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans.

11 In the Type Selector. click (Rectangle). click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 12 On the Options Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.7 On the View menu. Masking Portions of a View | 191 . NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Masking Region. select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 8 Select the crop region.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.14 On the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.Level 1. under Floor Plans.rvt. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Unit 18 Plan . click Finish Sketch. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and click Override. select Solid fill. click black. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Pattern Overrides. right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color. select Walls. for Pattern. Working with Visual Overrides | 193 . 4 On the View Control Bar. click in the Patterns field. under Visibility. and click Rename. 11 Click OK twice. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. and click 1/4''=1'0''. click the current scale. and click OK. and click OK. for Color.

click Modify. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 16 Under Visibility. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. clear Floors. and click OK. under Visibility. 18 Right-click. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

20 Right-click. 23 In the Color dialog. and click OK. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. click Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click <No Override> to apply a color. under Lines. click a purple color. Working with Visual Overrides | 195 . By using the previous method to make the selection. 25 Click OK twice. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Color.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. select Dash 1/16''.

30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 29 In the Color dialog. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. select the sofa. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 For Color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click Projection Lines. right-click.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click OK twice. click . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

right-click. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.32 Select one of the lamps. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 197 . how to add views to the sheets. 33 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. click . Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.

and click View. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click Training Files. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.

3 In the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . expand Sheets (all).Unnamed. For Sheet Name. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Creating Drawing Sheets | 199 . For Sheet Number. and select the title block. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter Site Plan. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. Click OK.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter A101. on the Options Bar.

enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter 15 May. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Client Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter J. 14 Click OK. click Edit. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. for Project Address. For Project Status. 2009. For Project Name. enter For Approval. For Project Number.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. under Other. enter 2009-1. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

Elevations A106 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Sections A108 . enter Floor Plan. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select the new sheet name. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. and click Rename. you add views to these sheets.rvt.rvt. Adding Views to Sheets | 201 . 17 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. and click OK.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Save.Layout Plan A104 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Elevations A105 . for Name.Elevations A107 . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.Stairs In the following exercise. and click OK.

drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and drag it to the sheet. select Level 1. The red border around the view no longer displays. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). click Modify. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. double-click A102 . under Sheets (all). and click to place the view.Floor Plan. 6 In the Project Browser.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Elevations. under Floor Plans. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click A104 .

click Modify.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. click Modify. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 203 . 12 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. align it with the East elevation. double-click A107 . 8 On the Design Bar.Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).

. zoom in to the grip. 16 Select title bar. and click OK. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. double-click A108 . Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and click to place it. and press TAB until it highlights. under Sheets (all). 18 Under Floor Plans. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs. for View Scale. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. move the cursor over it. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 205 . you must first activate the view on the sheet. In order to do this. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. under Floor Plans. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. double-click Level 1. and then make changes and deactivate the view.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.rvt. double-click A107 . 2 Select the building section view. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). and click Activate View.Sections. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. enter 54'. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click.

Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.6 Right-click. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 207 . 7 In the Project Browser. double-click North. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Deactivate View.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. right-click. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click Properties. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. click Camera. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. The camera view displays. 7 Place the camera as shown.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter T. select the new sheet name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. For Sheet Name. enter Title Sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. Click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. After you create the sheet. 208 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. under Floor Plans.

10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Far Clip Offset. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Eye Elevation. Under Camera. enter 420'. Under Extents.8 On the Options Bar. select Far Clip Active. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 60'. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 209 . 11 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Click OK. enter 5'. 12 On the View Control Bar.

14 Under 3D Views.13 In the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions). Click Apply.Title Sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Size. 210 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 15 With the view selected. for Height. under Sheets (all). Under Model Crop Size. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. on the Options Bar. and then click OK. enter 25''. double-click T .

and on the Options Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 211 . click Duplicate. for Show title.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. . click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. under Graphics. 19 Select the view on the sheet. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. select No. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. and close the exercise file.

212 .

and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. expand Floor Plans. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as doors and windows. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. click Training Files.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. 213 .Level 1. Tagging Objects In this lesson.rvt. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. such as room and window schedules. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. You also learn to create different types of schedules. Because of the open style floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. move the cursor to the right. and click Room and Area. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 5 Using the same method. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.

6 Using the same method. 7 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 215 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

type U18-1. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and click to place the room and tag.rfa. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click OK. 14 For Offset. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. type 8'. click it. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. and select the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. The room tag number displays in blue. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and press ENTER. click Training Files. 216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room.

and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 217 . ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor.18 Click the room text label. type Entry. 23 Using the same method. Dining. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 22 Click the room text label. type Kitchen. and press ENTER. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 19 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. click Room. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Modify. click Modify.

on the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. clear Room Separation. but they need to be tagged. click Modify. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. The rooms are already placed. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and moving clockwise. 27 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2. click Room Tag.

Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt. in the Project Browser. you learn how to place door and window tags.Level 1. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. clear Leader. expand Floor Plans. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Tag ➤ By Category. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 219 .

type U18-2. under Identify Data. 220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. and press ENTER.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. for Mark. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. type U18-1. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. click Properties). click Modify.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 221 . and drag it down to center it in the doorway. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. select Window Tags. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. click OK. verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category. click Load. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Training Files. click Tag All Not Tagged. 222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.rfa. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. expand Floor Plans. 20 In the Tags dialog. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Door Tags.Level 2.

26 Under Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the edge to which the leader connects. double-click Level 2. and modify the tag placement and display. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rfa. click Training Files. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. 28 Using the same method. Tagging Other Objects | 223 . click Yes to load a tag. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 Save the file. you learn how to tag furniture objects.rvt.Level 1. 4 Select a dining room chair. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. tag all untagged windows. expand Floor Plans. select Leader. 5 At the confirmation prompt.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .8 Select the furniture in the living room. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally. 11 Select the tag for the table. 12 Click the elbow control. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. clear Leader. and drag it up to form an angled leader. and on the Options Bar. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 14 Click Modify. and drag it above the chair tag.

Tagging Other Objects | 225 .16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. select Furniture Tag : Standard. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click Tag All Not Tagged.Level 2. and on the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser.

click Check None. 21 In the Filter dialog. you learn to add schedules. 22 In the Type Selector. and click OK. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.20 On the Options Bar. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. and click Modify. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. select Furniture Tags. click (Filter Selection). 226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Save the file.

you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in which windows are listed by window type. Next. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. that is. Finally.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 227 .

Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. and click View. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. and click OK. type Building Window Schedule. and double-click Level 1. 228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 For Name. select Windows.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK. 6 Under Available fields. click Training Files. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Comments and click Add.

However. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. you are prompted to open one that does. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. NOTE By clicking Show. click Show. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click View Properties. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. and on the Options Bar. right-click the schedule. in large building models with many views. 13 In the Project Browser. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Close.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. If no open view shows the selected element. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. this can be a time-consuming process. Creating a Window Schedule | 229 .

click Edit. click Edit. The window schedule is displayed. clear Itemize every instance.15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. The window type schedule is displayed. for Sort by. sorted by type mark. under Other. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Other. 23 Click OK twice. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. and press ENTER. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. 230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. you cannot use them to tag objects. and sill conditions for a window can be found. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. unlike shared parameters. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 231 . as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. jamb. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson.rvt.rvt. In this case. and double-click Building Window Schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

select Construction. select the following fields. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Type. for Name. and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 12 Click OK twice. for Fields. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. right-click Building Window Schedule. under Available fields. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Using the same method. under Other. For Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. click Add to create the new parameter. so that they are listed before Comments. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Under Parameter Data. click Edit. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. type Head Detail. 5 Click OK. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. type Unit 18 .rvt. for Head Detail. For example. and without releasing the left mouse button. type 2/A107. 14 On the Options Bar. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 233 . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. and Sill Detail. Under Name. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. select Doors. expand Floor Plans. TIP To select all 3 headers. type Window Details. select Head Detail. click in the Head Detail header. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Group.Door Schedule. and for Sill Detail. You then hide the column used for the filter. under Type Mark A. Jamb Detail. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule.Level 1. for Jamb Detail. type 3/A107. type 1/A107. click Schedule/Quantities.

and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. and click OK. select Family and Type. and double-click A102 .Unit 18. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. but is not included as a column in the schedule. select Hidden field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. 11 Under Field formatting. 6 Under Available fields. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 4 Click OK. Select contains in the second field. expand Sheets (all). verify that New Construction is selected.■ For Phase. 10 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select the following fields. Type U18 in the third field. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). select Mark.

16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 19 On the Design Bar.Door Schedule.13 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 235 . click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. click Unit 18 . click Modify.

NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. 7 Under Text.rvt. right-click in the Design Bar. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. under Available fields. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. under Floor Plans. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.20 Save the file. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 Using the same method. to the right of Header text. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. double-click Level 1. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. select Number. and click View. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Rooms. select Bold. and click Add. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. under Category. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 8 Click OK. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

10 Edit the number to be 101. For 104. For 102. 11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. click New. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. type Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. select Corridor. For 105. The room Number is U17-46. For 103. For 106. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 237 . 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. type Storage. type Stair. for Name. next to Rows. 101-106. for room 101. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. select Storage.

under Projection/Surface. place rooms from a program list. and click OK. select 9. For Room Separation. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. For Weight. and modify room names. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. double-click Level 1. In the Lines field. expand Lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans.rvt.13 Save the file. click the Lines field. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Override. Under Custom colors. click the Color field. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add room separation lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. First. draw the horizontal line. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the bright green swatch. click Room Separation. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 239 . click Modify.

select 101 Building Entry. for Room. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. select 102 Storage. 14 For Offset. type 8'. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).

Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Using the same method. and zoom in to the Corridor. click Modify. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 241 . double-click Level 1. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). double-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). under Floor Plans.

27 Select Schedule keys. 30 On the Options Bar.21 On the Options Bar. type As Selected. and click Add. and for all 3 finishes. clear Room Bounding. and Wall Finish. under Available fields. type Units. click 23 On the Design Bar. click New. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. under Constraints. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 24 Open the Room Schedule. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Floor Finish. select Rooms. (Element Properties). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 For Key Name. select Base Finish. while pressing CTRL. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Rows. click Modify. and click OK. under Category. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 26 In the New Schedule dialog.

for Room Style. under Floor Plans. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 36 Click OK twice. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 43 In the Filter dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. under Identity Data. and click OK. 38 Under U17-8. click (Filter Selection). for Fields. for Available fields. under Schedules/Quantities. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 243 . click (Element Properties). 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan.32 Using the same method. under Other. 44 On the Options Bar. select Units. click Edit. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Room Schedule. select Room Style. select Rooms. 42 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. click Check None. for Room Style. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Units. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. double-click Level 1. and click Properties.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. For rooms 102 and 105.46 Open the Room Schedule. select Service. and 106. for Name. click OK. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 48 Save the file. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. right-click Level 1. at the warning prompt. under Floor Plans. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.rvt. expand Floor Plans. click 5 For Title. under Views (all). select Public. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click Properties. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). (Duplicate). and click OK. type Room Type. select Room Style. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. for Color. 104. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. type Room Type. click the Color Scheme field. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1.

20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . click Edit Color Scheme. click Edit. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. clear Visible. and click OK.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Schemes. select the color legend. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 17 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click Modify. select Room Type. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 19 On the Options Bar. under Visibility. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the value in the Color column. 14 Click OK twice. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. and clear Room Separation. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

24 Click OK. under Graphics. 23 Using the same method. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. type 1''. 28 Under Title Text. click Modify. on the Options Bar. select blue. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and select Show Title. type 1/4''. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Size. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK twice.22 In the Color dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. for Swatch Width. click Edit/New. respectively. and click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. under Custom color. (Element Properties).

Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Sections. double-click Building Section. for Color Scheme. under Sections. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 35 Click OK twice. and click OK. click Color Scheme Legend. under Graphics. under Visibility. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Type. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 247 . NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. and select Properties. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. right-click Building Section. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Edit.

select Rooms. click . click Check None. 46 Click . for Room Style. and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select all the rooms in the stairwell.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. (Filter Selection). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. for Room Style. 41 On the Options Bar. select Public. and click OK. and click OK. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 42 In the Filter dialog. under Identity Data. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units.

click New. double-click Room Style Schedule.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. and click . under Key Name for the new row. excluding the stairwell spaces. for Room Style. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. under Identity Data. 51 On the Options Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 249 . select Service. 54 While pressing CTRL. for Rows. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. and click OK. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. type Suites.

Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.55 Click . The color fill extends to the roof. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. but not beyond it. and click OK. select Suites. under Volume Computations. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that At wall finish is selected. under Identity Data. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. for Room Style. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 Under Room Area Computation. select the room on the left side of the top floor. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select Areas and Volumes. The color fill will extend to the roof.

select the stairwell room. under Constraints. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 68 Click . 71 Click OK. 66 Click OK. select Level 2. for Upper Limit. the dining room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. type 0’ 0” . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. and the living room. . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 251 . click Modify. select Loft. type -10”. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 70 For Limit Offset. under Constraints. 67 On the first level. for Upper Limit.

73 Save the file.rvt. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under 3D Views. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Creating a Material Takeoff | 253 . 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.EPDM. For Then by. Clear Itemize every instance. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.Insulation on Plywood Deck . under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Family and Type. Select Grand totals. 9 Using the same method. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. click Family and Type. select Material: Description. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Roofs. click Modify.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. and click OK. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 5 On the Design Bar. under Category.

for Name. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Material: Cost. click the Formatting tab. and click OK twice. select Material: Area. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). and click Properties. and under Fields. and click Add. 12 Click OK. for Material: Cost. for Fields. 23 For Field formatting. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click Calculated Value.50 1. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. Under Field formatting. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. select Calculate totals.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Currency. under Other.25 4. click Estimated Cost. click Edit.75 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 Click OK. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 19 For Type. select Calculate totals. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. 20 For Formula. under Available fields. type Estimated Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff.

27 In the Format dialog. 28 For Unit symbol. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. click the Format value. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 31 Save the file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. These shared parameters can be added to any family. you create a shared parameter file. for Rounding. 30 Click OK twice. can be used for any number-based parameter. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and schedule the total distance of each path. creating a generic tag to tag the family. and are defined and stored in an external file.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . adding the shared parameters to a family. select $. You draw a travel path line. The cost fields are formatted correctly.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. which inserts commas after every three digits. tag the line. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and reporting the shared parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. not just for currency. Digit grouping. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 255 . you create an exiting plan for the building. In this lesson. 29 Select Use digit grouping. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. either within family components or within the project template. for Currency. regardless of category.

click Training Files. and click OK. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click New. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice.txt. for Type of Parameter. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. type Travel Distance. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 7 Under Parameters. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. and click OK. select Length. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. under Groups. type Path ID. click Create. for Name. for File name. 9 Under Parameters. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.rvt. for Name. click New. click New. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type Exiting.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. under Parameter Type. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. following the equals symbol (=).rvt. 13 Click Apply. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. Click Training Files. group it under Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.rfa.rvt. 12 In the Family Types dialog. select Shared parameter. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. If you have multiple projects open. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. click Add. in the Load into Projects dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 257 . and click OK. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Add. and click OK. and select Instance. 4 In the Family Types dialog. for Travel Distance Formula. for Group parameter under. click Family Types. otherwise the family loads into the current project. under Dimensions. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 14 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type Length. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Select. select Constraints. 8 Select Instance. 10 Using the same method. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. under Parameter Data. 15 If necessary. 11 Click OK.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. under Parameters. click Load into Projects. and click OK.

23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click Label. 24 Click OK twice. click Training Files.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rft. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. select Travel Distance. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). under Category Parameters. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and click OK. click parameter(s) to label). select Travel Distance. click Select. click Label. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.

click Load into Projects. 32 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.rfa. 33 On the Design Bar. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. select Path ID. type Travel Distance Tag.28 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and move it down. and press DELETE. 35 Save the file. for File Name. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window.rvt is selected. and click Save. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 29 In the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 259 . click Modify.

260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exiting Plan . above the exterior door as shown. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. After the lines are tagged. click Component. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Placing. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Tagging. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Level 1. and click in the center of the corridor. select Chain. under Floor Plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.

click Tag ➤ By Category. 13 While pressing CTRL. double click Exiting Plan . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 261 . and click outside of the building. 12 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected. through the door. clear Leader.Tagging. click Modify. type 1-1. and click (Element Properties). click Component. under Constraints. for Path ID. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. Placing. 17 On the Options Bar.7 Move the cursor down. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 10 On the Options Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.Level 2. and click OK. under Floor Plans.

262 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. 20 On the Design Bar. and click. and click above the door to the stair. 21 On the Design Bar. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click in the stair.19 Move the cursor up through the door.

under Category. . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 263 . 26 Select each of the travel path lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. 30 Using the same method. type 2-1. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.24 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. click Modify. type Level 1 Exit Distance.Tagging. 28 While pressing CTRL. 27 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Modify. 33 For Name. and click OK. Placing. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 40 Click the Formatting tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 41 Under Fields. and click Properties. under Other. and under Field formatting.rvt. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Path ID. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. type 1-. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Add. and in the third field. for Filter by. in the third field. in the second field. 264 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . in the first field. under Schedules/Quantities. select Path ID. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. under Available fields. 38 For Sort by. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. 49 Click OK twice. 42 Click OK. select Calculate totals. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 35 Click the Filter tab. 36 For Filter by. click Training Files. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type 2-. while pressing CTRL. click Edit. select contains. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 50 Save the file. and click Rename.

3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.6''. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. under Identity Data. expand C .Partitions .Interiors ➤ C10 .Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. under Categories. right-click the Design Bar. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 10 In the schedule. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities. 9 Click OK twice. for Assembly Code. select the following fields. select Walls. and select C1010145 . and click .Partitions ➤ C1010100 .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Fixed Partitions. click the Value field. right-click Generic . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 265 .

12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. the database display may be different than that shown. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click OK.rvt. 11 Click OK 3 times. 1 On the File menu. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 266 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.mdb. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. click the File Data Source tab. under Database. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Next. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. select a location for the database file. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. for Database Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. type Revit_Project. 3 Click New. and click OK to create the database.11 Close the exercise file. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Next. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 8 In the New Database dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog.mdb). 9 Under Directories. click Create. click Training Files. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.

A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. For example. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. in addition to the Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 267 . This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. 13 Close the exercise file. Additionally. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.

268 .

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 269 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.

The levels in the project are not shared. 3 On the Options Bar. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. If you did that now. click (Element Properties). for Elevation Base. expand Views (all). so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the Level 1 line. click Edit/New. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and double-click South. In the Name dialog. click Training Files. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. select Shared. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Relocating a Project | 271 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate.Shared Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. Under Constraints. and click OK. type 1/4'' Head . However. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red.

10 On the View menu. and press ENTER. click Modify. select Level : 1/4'' Head .By selecting the Level 1 line. you specify the new location of the project. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. 272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . type 325'.Shared Elevation. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. The base elevation now reads 325'. By typing 325' in this step. 12 In the Type Selector. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. 13 On the Design Bar. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line.

under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. select Levels 2-4. double-click North. the Penthouse level. Relocating a Project | 273 .The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. as well as other views of the building model. and the Roof Plan level. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . multi-segmented. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. In this case. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building.Shared Elevation. permanent dimensions are created automatically. click File menu ➤ Save As. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Dimensioning In this lesson. In Revit Architecture. and angular dimensions. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. Dimensioning on page 274. radial. select Level : 1/4'' Head . and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. click Modify. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. You place linear. On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components.■ ■ In the Type Selector. 16 If you want to save your changes. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.

and double-click Level 1. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. select it.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. By default. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Dimension. and are created by selecting individual reference points. Creating Dimensions | 275 . snap to wall centerlines. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. dimensions are aligned. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.

5 Move the cursor above the view. select it. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. 276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension.

click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. and select it. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 277 . 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. click Dimension. The lock displays as locked.

11 Using the same method. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. select the right endpoint of the planter. 12 On the Options Bar. 278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the right side of the curtain wall. but below the first dimension that you placed. and select its left exterior face. for Prefer. 16 Move the cursor up. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select Wall Faces. above the plan view of the building. 14 Move the cursor to the right.

23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. and click OK. select Baseline. Creating Dimensions | 279 . enter Linear . 18 On the Basics tab.3/32" Arial . 22 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. enter Linear . for Dimension String Type. under Graphics.Ordinate. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 27 Click OK twice.Baseline. select Ordinate. click Duplicate. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 25 In the Name dialog. click Modify.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.3/32" Arial . Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string.

34 Click OK. select Linear . or to the right of a permanent dimension value. enter Planter. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.3/32" Arial . for example Text dialog displays. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. 280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . . select Linear . below.29 Select the dimension string. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. for Below. 33 Under Text Fields.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style.Baseline. 30 In the Type Selector. and in the Type Selector. to the left. under Dimension Value.

suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. For Prefer.35 On the Design Bar. select Wall faces. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. Creating Dimensions | 281 . click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 37 On the Design Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. and select it. click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ.

44 With the dimension still selected. and click OK. for Suffix. 46 On the Basics tab.42 Select the radial dimension. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click the dimension text. click Modify. type Typ. 282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning ..

click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 283 .Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. verify that Wall faces is selected. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. For Prefer. 50 Select the horizontal line. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

expand Floor Plans. 53 On the Basics tab. expand Views (all). click Modify. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 284. and double-click Level 3. you select only the wall. When you dimension the wall.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click to place the dimension. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. 284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc.

select Openings. and select Widths. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. select Entire Walls. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. For Pick. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. click Dimension. Click Options. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 285 . and click to place the automatic dimension string. select Wall centerlines. Click OK.

7 On the Basics tab. 286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . However. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Lines on page 286.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. for a multi-segmented dimension. expand Floor Plans. click Modify. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. in some cases. When you place dimensions. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. For example. expand Views (all).

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. Controlling Witness Lines | 287 . click Dimension. and select it. select Individual References. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick. verify Wall centerlines is selected.

9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. move the cursor down. select the bottom right endpoint. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the right edge of the planter. 288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . 10 Using the same method.7 Using the same method. and select it. and click to place the dimension.

for Prefer. 13 On the Options Bar.11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension. select it. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. select Wall centerlines. click Dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. Controlling Witness Lines | 289 . Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab.

16 On the Design Bar. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. click Modify. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 19 Release SHIFT. 18 While pressing SHIFT. and click to place the dimension. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .

23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 22 On the Basics tab. and using the same methods. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 291. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 291 . you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. text font. you change the dimension tick mark. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. drag it to the right. After you create the new family type.20 Click the blue middle grip.

rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. and select the lower dimension. for Tick Mark. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. select Arrow 30 Degree. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. type Office Standard. 2 Click (Element Properties).

9 In the Type Selector. select another font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 293 . select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. ■ Click OK twice. 7 On the Basics tab. For Text Font. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. select CityBlueprint. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. type 1/8”. 10 On the Basics tab.■ ■ Under Text. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. for Text Size. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify. and select the bottom dimension.

create a new angular dimension type. 294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning .11 Using the same method. and how to add leaders to the text notes. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Text Annotation on page 294. select the angular dimension on the planter.

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. click Text.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295 . click (None). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. but below the upper dimension string. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click and drag to create a text box. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.

296 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. for Text Size. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Under Text. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. and click OK. and click OK. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. type 1/4''. click Duplicate. select Arc Leaders. If so. type EXISTING BUILDING. click Modify. 7 Select the text box. and click . click Edit/New.5 In the text box.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 297 . ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Text. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. and type Planting Bed. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. Click (Add Left Arc Leader).Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader).

Click Rename. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. for Text Font. 20 On the Design Bar. In the Rename dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Under Text. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. for Leader Arrowhead. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 298 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. type Standard Notes. and click OK. Click OK twice. for New. Under Graphics. select CityBlueprint.

click Text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. and type 18'' Conc. click (Arc). select Text: Standard Notes. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 26 In the Type Selector. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. Wall. 27 On the Options Bar.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 31 Click in the text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 299 . click to place the text box. and click Modify. for Leader. over the Planting Bed text.

click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.32 If you want to save your changes. 300 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

you trace over the building model geometry. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. plywood. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. In the callout view. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard door header condition.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. In order to detail from the building model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. add detail components. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. These components display at the required scale. 301 . and metal studs. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.

for Graphics ➤ Display Model. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you detail the view of the roof edge. 5 In the alert dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Detail Component. region objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. as well as detail lines. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. select As underlay.rfa.Detailing the View In this exercise. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 7 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Training Files. double-click the detail callout head. and insulation objects. After you add components. They are also view specific. which means that all detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exact location is not important. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. and click Open.rvt. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. and click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load detail components. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.

18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 13 In the Name dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.8 Delete the component. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). enter 1' 4". 17 In the drawing area. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 15 For Spacing. and click OK. click Repeating Detail. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 10 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 16 Click OK twice. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. for Pattern ➤ Detail. Detailing the View | 303 . select Corrugated Metal.

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 24 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. ■ ■ Click Modify. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected.rfa. click Detail Component. click (Move). click Training Files. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.19 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. and click Open.

27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Detailing the View | 305 . select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click OK. click Training Files.Because you still have several components to load. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. click Detail Component. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. 31 To properly orient the component. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. and click Open.rvt. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown.

Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". click the Flip instance arrows. 35 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Modify. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

42 Click Modify. select to near side. enter 5 1/2".Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 307 . and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. (Move). click Insulation.

46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. as shown. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component.■ Click Modify. 47 In the Type Selector. 45 In the Type Selector. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. and lock the component. click Detail Component. 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Plywood-Section : 3/4". 51 Click Modify.

For Offset. 2 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines on page 309. as shown. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. select Thin Lines. enter 1/4". click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 309 . 5 Select the vertical plywood component. meaning they display only in this view. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. they are view specific. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 4 Click Modify.rvt. 7 In the Type Selector. Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. click (Draw). For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. 11 In the Type Selector. enter 1/4".10 On the Design Bar. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . as shown. as shown. select Chain. click Detail Lines. 16 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. and clear Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown.

select the Penthouse level line. select Do not display. draw the detail lines as shown. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select Thin Lines. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. right-click. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. When you turn the display model off. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click Properties. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and click OK. 18 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Detail Lines | 311 .

select Vapor Barrier. 26 In the Type Selector. 30 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . For Offset. press SPACEBAR as necessary. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select Break Line. enter 1/2". 29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.32 Click Modify. and click to place the dimension. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 313 . click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.rvt. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click Dimension. click Text. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. you add text notes to complete the detail. Adding Text Notes on page 313. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Enter the text.

Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. on the Options Bar. for Suffix. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and save the exercise file. select a text note.7 Click Modify. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click the dimension text. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Select All Instances. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click 6 In the Filter dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click. click Roof Overhang Detail. 8 Select the dimension line.rvt. under Text Fields. Creating Detail Components on page 314. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter Typ. and click OK. (Filter Selection). Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser.Keynotes. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click. and press DELETE.

16 Click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 7 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. while pressing CTRL. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and selecting the chain. 14 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. pressing TAB. Creating Detail Components | 315 .rft. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. select all the coping linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. in the Type Selector.

clear Detail Items. 27 On the Design Bar. enter Roof Edge. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 21 To place the component. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. While pressing SHIFT. 22 Click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog.rfa. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. and click Save. click Load. click . delete the underlying linework. select the coping. double-click it in the Project Browser. The original linework remains selected. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.Keynotes view is not the open view. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and the component can be placed in the detail. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 23 Using a window. click Detail Component. 28 On the Options Bar. and click Open. 26 Press DELETE. Adding Keynotes on page 317. 18 In the Save As dialog. for File name. navigate to your preferred location. 30 In the drawing area. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Using the same method used previously. and click OK.

2 In the alert dialog. For the metal coping. Click to place the leader arm. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. click Keynote ➤ Element. Roof Edge4. use keynote 06160.rfa.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. use keynote 07645.rvt. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click OK. 3/4" Plywood.B5. Adding Keynotes | 317 . 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation.C1. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. you place keynotes on objects. click Training Files.D11. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. In the Keynotes dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.

FasciaProfile_1. 17 Keynote the component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 2x6. click Keynote ➤ Element. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). 10 In the Keynotes dialog.6 Click Modify. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 09250.F1. For the 2x12.G1. use keynote 06160. use keynote 06110. and click . Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. For the 2x8.F1. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.20 Ga. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. use keynote 06110.D11. use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. using keynote 07460. You do this in order to keynote the component. select Corrugated Metal. 12 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.D1. navigate to 07645. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 319. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. 18 Save the file. click in the Value column.I1. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 7/8" Corrugated Steel .A8.

you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 319 . click Load. 19 In the Name dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. 15 Click Modify. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Selector. and select the right end point. 6 Lock the line. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). click Detail Component. and click Save. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Load into Projects. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. 8 In the Save As dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Press DELETE.rvt. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. select Medium Line Detail Component. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to your preferred location. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Lines.rft. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. select Medium Lines. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 16 Select the component. for File name. select the left end point of the reference line.

44 On the Design Bar. invisible. 40 Click Modify. 24 While pressing CTRL. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 46 Click Modify. click in the Value column. 28 In the Type Selector. and click Open. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and i_Light Line Detail Component. 38 On the Design Bar. and click the lower end at the break line. 27 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 31 Select the component. click Training Files. against the 3/4" plywood. 25 Next. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and assign it keynote 07260. and hidden) used in the view. and assign it keynote 06110. and click . 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. 29 In the drawing area. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click OK.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Edit/New. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 48 Using the same method used previously. name the component Air Barrier. i_Invisible Line Detail Component.A5. and click . 41 Select the component just added. 34 In the Name dialog.A1. 47 Select the component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . 37 Click OK 3 times.G1. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select i_Light Line Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 30 Click Modify. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. (Move). Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 49 With the component selected. enter EPDM Membrane. and click .

select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 52 In the Type Selector.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. leaving the detail component lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 321 . select Chain. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 55 Click Modify.

65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.58 Using the method used previously. and Vapor Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Detail Component. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component.A4. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. name the component Vapor Barrier. 63 In the drawing area. 61 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. select Invisible Lines. 60 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 67 In the Type Selector. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. select the component. in the Type Selector. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa.rfa. 2 x 8 Framing. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.

Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. under Path Type.A4. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt. Enter 07460. select all the keynotes. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 9 In the drawing area. and press TAB. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. under Keynote Table. add a keynote for the component. 3 In the text editor. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Enter 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog.69 Select the component. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click to place the leader. and press ENTER. click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 323. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and click OK. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click Browse. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click to place the note.A1. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click Modify. and press TAB.rvt. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and click Open. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 323 . In the Type Selector. The database file opens in a text editor. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A9. 70 Using the method used previously. select Absolute. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and click . and click OK. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A1. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt. name the component Batt Insul. 72 Save the file. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 71 In the drawing area. and close the text editor. navigate to 07463. and assign it keynote 07210.

The detail that you import is in DWG format. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Scale. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 13 Click Modify. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select 3" = 1'-0". Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. select Black and White. After you create a drafting view. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Positioning.Center to Center is selected. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.dwg. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 14 Save the file.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. verify that Auto . and click OK. click Training Files. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. For Colors.

6 In the Project Browser. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the callout. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout on page 325. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Callout.■ Click Open. select Reference other view. Creating a Reference Callout | 325 . and use the callout grips to move the callout head. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). enter EPDM Metal Coping. 5 Click Modify. right-click Drafting 1. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.rvt.

for New. double-click A105 .No Reference. click Edit/New.Elev. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click the callout. click Rename. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. delete the existing value. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The callout is updated with the sheet information. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 12 Click OK twice. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser.No Reference). 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and click Properties. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. enter Detail ./Sect./Details.

Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. enter Header @ Sliding Door. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 327 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. for Name.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.18 Save the file. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. click Detail Component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.

click . select the left and bottom edges of the region. 14 Click OK 3 times. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. click Region Properties. 18 While pressing CTRL. Board. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. 11 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Finish Sketch. select the width dimension. 17 Click Modify. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. select Wide Lines. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. and enter 5/8". for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. enter Gyp. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 19 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Select the left edge of the region.

Move the cursor up.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and on the Edit toolbar. 24 Select the mirrored region. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). (Draw). and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 22 On the Options Bar.

30 In the Name dialog. verify that the thickness is 3/4". 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. enter Wood . On the Options Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click Duplicate.Finish. and select the right edge of the wood region.25 Click Modify. Draw a rectangle as shown. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click OK. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. in the Type Selector. select Wood . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. click (Align). 33 Click OK 3 times. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. click (Rectangle). for Name.

verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . select Medium Lines. sketch the new region as shown.37 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. For Offset. click Ref Plane. 38 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 1/4". 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click . click Filled Region. and press ENTER. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 42 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Move the cursor right 1". 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. enter 3/8". and press ENTER. click Filled Region. Move the cursor down 1'. and press ENTER.46 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset. Select Chain. and click to select the point. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. enter 0. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. click 48 Click Modify. and click to select the point. For Offset. (Align). and click to select the point. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Move the cursor left 1".

60 Select the left. 56 On the Design Bar. enter 1/8". 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).54 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). and right edges of the door panel region. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. top. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 58 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.

334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. and press ENTER. select the height dimension. enter 3".rfa. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. click Load. click Training Files. and click Open. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.61 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 65 On the Options Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. 68 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

use the images as a guide. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Detail Lines. 78 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. and click Open.rfa. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Training Files. 71 On the Options Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 76 In the Type Selector. click . navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. click Load. select Thin Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. select Wide Lines. click Detail Component.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .82 Select the rectangle. 87 Click Modify. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 85 On the Options Bar. click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.

click Detail Lines. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.89 On the Design Bar. as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. 92 Select the line. and on the Edit toolbar.

103 Add two break lines as shown. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 102 In the Type Selector. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. select the length dimension. 95 On the Design Bar. select Break Line. 101 On the Design Bar. 99 Click Modify. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 1/8". and click to place the arc as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click .94 Select the mirrored line on the right. and press ENTER. 97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component.

109 In the Type Properties dialog. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 113 Click OK 3 times. 105 In the drawing area.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. select To the nearest 1/16". For Rounding. click Dimension. for Text ➤ Units Format. click Dimension. The dimension display is updated. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 339 . Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. . 114 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. and click Modify. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 106 Click to place the dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. the new style displays only inches. and click OK. 110 In the Name dialog. 107 Select the dimension line.3/32" Arial. click in the Value column. Select Suppress 0 Feet. enter Detail Linear .

3/32”Arial. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 340 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Replace With Text. and then click the dimension text. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial.115 In the Type Selector. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 120 Under Text Fields. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. and enter Varies. 117 Select the dimension line. 121 Click OK. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. enter See Schedule. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . click Dimension. for Below. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. using the Drag Text grip. and click Modify.

Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. 130 Click OK. under Dimension Value. and click the dimension text. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 341 . 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. select Replace With Text.125 Select Modify to end the command. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 128 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.

133 In the drawing area. click Text. click (Add Right Arc Leader).Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text. and on the Options Bar. 135 Select the note. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click to create an arced leader. 342 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Modify to end the command. 138 On the Design Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 132 In the Options Bar. Board. 134 Enter Gyp. and click Modify. 139 Save the file. select the gypsum board region on the left.

including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. 343 .Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. and double-click East. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.

rfa. 8 Select the keynote. type 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 7 On the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders.Hexagon. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Symbol. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

under Identity Data. Creating a Note Block | 345 . click (Element Properties). click (Copy). on the Options Bar. and click above the tag to place the copy. and click OK.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text. type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag.

on the Edit toolbar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. type Repair existing door surround. and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 18 Using the same method. 16 For Tag. and click.14 With the copy selected. 15 For Text. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click (Element Properties). type B. (Mirror). 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 19 With the tag selected. click Copy. 17 Click OK.

C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 347 . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall. click Modify. 22 Optionally. Repair existing door surround. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Remove all existing windows. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. using the table as a reference. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair as required.

for Heading. 29 In the Project Browser. Clean cut and repair wall as required. type Description. Create. and click Add.Elevations. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and select Bold. and double-click A103 . select Tag. On the Formatting tab.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 26 Click OK. type Exterior Construction Notes. for Header text. for the value. select Center. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Sort by. On the Appearance tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. format. Select Text. under Available fields. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 27 In the column header (text). On the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Sheets (all). and for Alignment. 28 In the Project Browser. and click Add. for Note block name. verify that Arial is selected. select Exterior Construction Notes. type 1/4''. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Tag. and click OK. type Mark. and drag it to the sheet. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 24 In the New Note Block dialog.

click Modify. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.31 On the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all).rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists | 349 .

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select Sheet Number. Select Sheet Name. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and in the third field. On the Filter tab. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and click Add. select Sheet Number. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. type T. in the second field.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Index. 5 In the list title field. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Number. select does not equal. The drawing list displays. ■ 4 Click OK. for Sort by. and drag it to the sheet. for Filter by. double-click T . in the first field. expand Schedules/Quantities. and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 11 Save the file.9 On the Design Bar. On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Training File Using Legends | 351 . 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. windows. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. On construction documents. and door frames. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. door frame schedule. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Finally. click Modify. doors. and so on). For the text.

Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Arial.Open Level Head .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click Text. and click OK twice. type 1/8''. for Name. click . 9 For Text Font. click Symbol. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type Legend Text. click Duplicate. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. 10 For Text Size. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Edit/New. and click OK. type Typical Symbol Legend.

drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 16 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Legends. and double-click A101 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. verify that is selected. Creating a Symbol Legend | 353 . 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 14 Working from the top down. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and for Leader. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and click to place it.

21 In the Type Selector.17 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. 19 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.Unit 18. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 23 Save the file. double-click A102 . 22 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. 3 For Scale. 9 Select the second wall. and press ENTER. select Section. click Modify. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. For View. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. type 4th Floor Wall Types. for Family. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. for Name. For Host length. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. type 3'. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and on the Options Bar. click Legend Component. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.rvt. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

12 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click to add text without a leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 11 In the Type Selector. click Text.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for Leader.

Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 18 Type the following text. Creating a Component Legend | 357 . 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.

drag it onto the sheet. 22 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 24 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Legends. select Level 4. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. right-click Sheets (all). 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Floor Plans. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. The open drawings are both visible. Creating a Component Legend | 359 . double-click Level 4. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click (Match Type). click Modify to end the command.25 On the Design Bar. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. 28 In the Project Browser.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. select Detail Level: Medium. 33 Select the patio divider wall. 34 On the View Control Bar.32 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

Using the table. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise. double-click Level 4. These changes can be due to owner requests. contractor inquiries.rvt. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision.35 Optionally. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking | 361 . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. click 36 Save the file. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. under Floor Plans. or changes in building material availability. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. If Visible is not selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 7 Under Show. When you use this option. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. for Numbering. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When Issued is selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. type a date. the revision is locked and issued to the field. For example. In most instances. If you select Per Sheet. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In general. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. verify that Per Project is selected. yet as concise as possible.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. 5 For Description. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 9 Save the file. click (Move). You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. including revision number and revision date. you make changes to the project floor plan. move the cursor up. Sketching Revision Clouds | 363 . 5 Select the divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4.rvt. 6 On the Design Bar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 3 Select the divider. click Modify.8 Click OK. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click near the partition you moved.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Finish Sketch. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. select Snaps Off. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. In the Snaps dialog. click Revision Cloud. and click OK. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. select 6. 16 Click OK. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 17 Save the file. you load a revision tag into the project. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 365 . Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.

the tag is displayed inside the cloud. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.rfa. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 4 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. select Leader. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you need to add one. scroll down to Revision Clouds. under Floor Plans. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 Click to place the tag. click OK. Because you chose to number by project. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Tags. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. double-click Level 4. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 10 In the drawing area. You then issue a revision. 5 In the Tags dialog. 6 Click Load. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and because the revision is the first in the project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.rvt. 12 Save the file. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Training Files. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Training File 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.rvt. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. and click OK. Working with Revisions | 367 . and enter a date. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. with the description Relocate Door. and enter a date for the revision. 7 For Description. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. click Add.Unnamed. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. type Modify Paving Area. under Sheets. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 9 Click OK. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You can continue to add revisions. you can no longer modify it. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. you prevent further changes to the revision. 8 Add another revision row. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. double-click A107 . You do this by issuing the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Issued.

20 On the Project Browser. 3 . select the revision cloud. under Sheets (all). 2 . Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. double-click A107 . under Floor Plans. 19 To add tags. select Seq. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. for Revision. 11 On the Drafting tab. double-click Level 4. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 10 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. apply Seq. click to add a revision clouds.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . in the drawing area. select Tag ➤ By Category. 17 Using the same method learned previously.Modify Paving Area. select Revision Cloud. 12 In the drawing area. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area.Unnamed.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 13 Click Finish Sketch.

Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Sequence. Working with Revisions | 369 . clear Issued. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. delete the first 3 characters. select Alphabetic. for Numbering. Click Options. beginning with "D". and rotation) to the revision schedule. For each revision. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 26 In the drawing area. select the titleblock.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You do this so that the revision can be changed. 25 Click OK twice. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. you edit the titleblock family. height.

click Modify. 34 On the Design Bar.27 On the Options Bar. and drag it above the schedule area. and click Properties. click Edit. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Select Grid lines. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. for Appearance. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. select Bottom-up. for Build Schedule. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Yes. Select Outline. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. under Other. right-click Revision Schedule. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 33 Select the schedule header. and press DELETE. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Clear Blank row before data. click Load into Projects. click Yes. click Edit Family. 28 In the alert dialog.

48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. select User defined. for Formatting.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 45 On the Appearance tab. under Other. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Rotation on Sheet. click Edit. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with Revisions | 371 . select 90° Counterclockwise. right-click Revision Schedule. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. and on the Options Bar. With a user-defined height. 40 Select the revision schedule header. When the height property is variable. 46 Click OK twice. select the revision schedule. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. for Heading. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. open the titleblock family for editing. for Height. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. enter Rev.

50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 372 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. text. 51 Save the file.

double-click T .Importing Image Files In this exercise. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Text.JPG. Importing Image Files | 373 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and place it on a sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. click to add text without a leader.Title Sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. double-click T . for Leader.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Modify. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.Title Sheet. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 6 Select the text. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 11 Save the file. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Training File 374 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .doc text file in another window. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. with the new text box still selected. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Spreadsheets | 375 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.xls. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.JPG. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 12 Save the file. under Sheets. for Name.mdi.rvt. 10 On the Design Bar. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 3 In Microsoft Excel. click Desktop. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Modify. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. 5 Click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. This step has been completed for you. for File name. double-click A102 .JPG. click File menu ➤ Print. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.Unit 18. and click Save. type Fixture Schedule. and saved as Fixture Schedule. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 4 Under Printer. click Training Files. select the document writer. This process may vary from system to system. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

376 .

377 . To effectively document this project. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. called dependent views. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 379 . you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.

5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. select the crop region. right-click Level 2. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 2 In the Project Browser. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 3 In the Project Browser.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and the model crop is the interior crop region. and click Rename.Aviary. enter Level 2 . and click OK. The dependent view opens. under Floor Plans. 6 In the drawing area. double-click Level 2. under Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . click (Hide Crop Region).

right-click Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. 15 Select the crop region. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. enter Level 2 . 14 Click in the drawing area. and click Rename.Labs.10 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

19 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Matchline. click Modify. 20 Click in the drawing area. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . click (Hide Crop Region). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 16'. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

33 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline. click Level 2 .Unnamed. for Name. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. right-click A101 .Aviary. select 9. and click Rename. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 385 . 28 For Line Pattern. expand Sheets. for Line Weight. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash 5/8''. click OK to accept the default titleblock. enter Level 2 Aviary. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. and drag it onto the sheet.

40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.35 On the Design Bar. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. for Target view. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. click View Reference. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. double-click Level 2. 386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Labs dependent view on the sheet. click Modify. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 39 On the Options Bar. and place the Level 2 . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.Aviary is selected.

42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.Labs. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 387 . 41 On the Options Bar. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click the far right control. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 48 Select the crop region. 49 If. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 47 On the View Control Bar. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. under Floor Plans. click (Show Crop Region). 388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Aviary. after modifying the annotation crop region. double-click Level 2 . right-click.46 In the Project Browser.

53 In the Select Views dialog. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 52 In the Project Browser. select all views in the list. and click Apply Dependent Views. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. 51 On the View Control Bar. 55 On the Zoom flyout.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 389 . 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser. expand Level 1. and click OK. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. right-click Level 2. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.

right-click South Elevation. 390 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 In the Project Browser.57 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click South Elevation. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 391 . select the Crop Region. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. for Name. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 4 In the Rename View dialog. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. expand South Elevation. 11 Select the crop region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 10 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. right-click South Elevation.Left. and drag it toward the center of the view. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 5 In the drawing area. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.Right. 7 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation .The dependent view opens. cropping the view to the aviary. 9 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the lab building. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

and click OK. right-click A103 Unnamed. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 16 In the Project Browser.13 On the View Control Bar. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 18 In the Project Browser. 392 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click South Elevation . and drag it onto the sheet. 20 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.Left. and drag it onto the sheet. under Elevations. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. for Name. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click (Hide Crop Region).Right. enter South Elevation. and click Rename. click South Elevation . under Elevations.

verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. for Target view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 393 . 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.Left is selected. 28 On the Options Bar. click Modify.22 On the Design Bar. double-click South Elevation. 25 On the Options Bar. select Elevation: South Elevation . 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. click View Reference.Right. under Elevations. for Target view. 23 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. NOTE If the view references are not visible. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. under Sheets (all). 394 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Right-click the view.South Elevation.30 On the Design Bar. Select the crop region. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. and click Activate View. double-click A103 . 31 In the Project Browser.

Viewing and Rendering 395 .

396 .

you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. Daytime rendering of the pool house 397 .

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. After you create the perspective view. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. the pad. you specify options that define the model environment. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. When you complete these changes. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. add trees to the building site. and create the perspective view that you want to render. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. and then render a final exterior view. 398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 399

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 401

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 403

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 405.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 405

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 407

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View on page 409.

Creating a Perspective View
In this exercise, you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

Creating a Perspective View | 409

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open, on the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point:

Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

The perspective view displays.

410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 Zoom out, and select the crop boundary. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground, as shown. Depending on camera placement, the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site, and adjust the field of vision, as necessary. If the camera is not shown in the view, in the Project Browser, right-click 3D View 1, and click Show Camera. With the camera shown, the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.

Creating a Perspective View | 411

6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Exterior - Day, and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser, double-click Exterior - Day to open the view, and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

10 Save the file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 413.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating the Exterior Rendering
In this exercise, you specify the time and location settings for the rendering, and render a daytime view of the exterior.

You then duplicate the view, modify render settings, and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Exterior - Day.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 413

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Rendering Dialog).

You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings, see Re-orienting the Project on page 453. 3 In the Rendering dialog, under Lighting, for Sun, select Edit/New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, select Spring Equinox, and click Rename. 5 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Spring Equinox - Santa Monica, 3pm. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog, under Background, select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required. In this case, the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. NOTE If a background image is required, export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium, and click Render.

414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

9 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model. After the image is rendered, you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open.

10 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog, click Export. 12 In the Save Image dialog:
■ ■ ■

In the left pane, click Desktop. For Files of type, select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). Click Save.

The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 415

21 In the Light Groups dialog. under Lighting. click Render. and click Artificial Lights. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. on the View Control Bar. for Scheme. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. dialog. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. enter Pool House Lights. click New. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 27 In the Rendering dialog.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.120V to the Pool Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . select the first light. and click OK. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. enter Pool Lights. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V. under Ungrouped Lights. press and hold SHIFT.Night view open. and click Move to Group.Night. verify that Pool Lights is selected. 16 With the Exterior . click Dialog). click New.Exterior . right-click Exterior . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. select Exterior: Artificial only. add 30 :Sconce Light .Night.Day view to Exterior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Flat Round : 60W . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . for Name.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . you duplicate the view and change the settings. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Group Options. for Name. 22 Using the same method. and select the last light. click OK. 25 Using the same method.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . To select a sequential list. under Group Options. under 3D Views.Day.

30 In the Rendering dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. enter 4. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. under Image. you change the brightness of the exposure. After the image is rendered. click Adjust Exposure.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. In this example. Rendering an Interior View on page 417. for Exposure Value. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and click OK. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. click Show the model. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View | 417 .

418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and finally. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. render the views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.rvt.

6 Select the figure. the person’s line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. ■ (Rotate). click Modify. double-click Level 1. Exact placement is not important. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. click Component. and on the Edit toolbar. select RPC Female : YinYin. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Adding RPC People | 419 .Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 4 In the Type Selector. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. and place the component inside the pool house. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

you can enable this option. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. click Edit. click Modify. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. on the Options Bar.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. for Render Appearance Properties. under Identity Data. click Edit/New. 13 On the Design Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Parameters. click (Element Properties). By default. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 Click OK 3 times. 14 Save the file. select Cast Reflections. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity.

rvt. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 421 .15 Proceed to the next exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 421. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. select Section Box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click Properties.The perspective view displays.

double-click Level 1. In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click South. 8 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. 11 In the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). select the section box. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 423 . under Floor Plans. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

size the box as shown. right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. 14 In the 3D view.12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. select the section box. 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 17 Save the file. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 425. and render the interior view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 425 . you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view.15 Maximize the 3D view. and curtain walls. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Render. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. enter Interior . and click Rename.rvt. 2 In the Rename View dialog. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. for Setting. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. and click OK. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. clear Pool Lights. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 7 Under Quality. and click OK. under Lighting. 4 In the Rendering dialog.Night. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you turn them off for this scene. select Interior: Artificial only. 8 In the Rendering dialog. You can specify a lower quality. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 5 Click Artificial Lights. select Draft. right-click 3D View 1.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. After these settings are established.

select Edit. For more information on daylight portals. Creating the Interior Rendering | 427 . 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. 17 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser.9 Close the Rendering dialog. for Sun. for Scheme. By default they are turned off. the daylight portals can be turned on. select Curtain Walls. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect.Night. (Show Rendering Dialog). This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. You create a view for the interior during the day. right-click Interior . you must create a custom setting. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog.Santa Monica.Day. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. and click OK. In this case. but the space will receive standard daylighting. For sunlit interiors. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. select Region. in order to turn on daylight portals. select Interior: Sun only. click Copy To Custom. select Spring Equinox . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click 14 For Setting. for Daylight Portal Options. 13 In the Rendering dialog. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. and click Render. The preset schemes are read-only. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.

Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK. (Element 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. For Saturation. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. enter 1. select the column on the right. click Show the model. click Properties). click Adjust Exposure. 20 In the Rendering dialog. and close the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 10.18 In the Rendering dialog. In the next steps. under Image.

click the dimensions for Size. select High. and click OK. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. and on the Options Bar. You change the varnish setting. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and click Render. For Amount. Creating the Interior Rendering | 429 . you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 32 In the Rendering dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For Bump. enter 5''. select the crop boundary. As size and DPI are increased. add a bump map to create texture. enter 90. select Based on wood grain. For Width. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. for Setting. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 30 In the drawing area. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. the render time increases significantly. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Wood. select Unfinished. click OK. 26 Click Update Preview. 24 In the Materials dialog. for Resolution.6. Click OK. clear Region. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. 29 In the Rendering dialog. under Output Settings. select Printer. 23 With the column still selected. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Scale (locked proportions).

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. elevation. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. but you can also define it in a 3D. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view.The rendered image displays. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Usually. or section view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player.

and double-click 1st Floor. and click the tab in the context menu. click Training Files. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Walkthrough. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Townhouse. on the Options Bar.rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and change unit formats as desired. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. proceeds through the dining room. verify that Perspective is selected. expand Views (all). click Settings ➤ Project Units. right-click in the Design Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Creating a Walkthrough | 431 . If you prefer to use metric values. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. click Finish. 432 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.

14 Click . 12 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 1. enter 16''. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. for Width. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and select the crop boundary. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. select the crop boundary. If it is not. 16 On the Options Bar. verify that Field of view is selected. Creating a Walkthrough | 433 . click the dimensions for Size. enter 9''. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. for Frame. and for Height. 11 Under Change. 17 Click . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.

Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Extents. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.rvt. click Edit Walkthrough. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. c_Townhouse. proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. and click OK. double-click 1st Floor. click (Element Properties). you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 434 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Floor Plans. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 434. 2 On the Options Bar. press ESC. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active.The walkthrough plays.

7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. 6 On the Options Bar.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). for Controls. select Path. and drag it to the location shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 435 . so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration.

without opening Revit Architecture 2009. enter 15. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 To play the walkthrough. select <Shading>. If you are unsure of what option to use. and click OK. and click OK.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. for Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. on the Options Bar. . 8 If you want to save this exercise. shading with edges. for Compressor.rvt. 3 Under Format. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. Recording the Walkthrough on page 436. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. reducing the size of the image. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. under Output Length. double-click Walkthrough 1. specifying the number of frames. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. The walkthrough is recorded. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. or rendering. shading. 436 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and click Save. c_Townhouse. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. hidden line. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. for Frames/sec. under Walkthroughs. When you export the walkthrough. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Edit Walkthrough. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.

you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. More specifically. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. 437 . In this tutorial. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the View toolbar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. 1 In the Project Browser. A 3D view is created. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click Camera. expand Views (all).rvt. as 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Creating a Solar Study . click Training Files. (SteeringWheels). and double-click 01 Entry. as shown. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click shown.

expand 3D Views. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 439. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 439 .5 On the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. enter Solar Study .Courtyard View. 8 In the Rename View dialog. if necessary. click Save As. click Section. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. right-click 3D View 1. double-click 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. and click Rename. 9 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 6 Click the view boundary to select it.

8 In the Rename View dialog. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Rename. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 13 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. click . 7 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head. right-click Section 1. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. as shown. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. and click OK.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 6 To view the section. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click 10 On the View toolbar. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.

18 On the File menu. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 441. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. click . enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. including the house. and click OK. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. then Fine. right-click {3D}. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 17 To hide the section box. double-click 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. click Callout. you create a plan cutaway view. 16 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 441 . click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 5 In the Project Browser. do not display many elements in 3D. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. clear Section Boxes. In some cases. Typical plan views. then select Medium. under 3D Views.

8 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 16 On the View Control Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 11 On the Design Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. as shown. 15 Select the Roof. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 9 On the SteeringWheel. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click (SteeringWheels).

under 3D Views. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.17 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 21 On the File menu. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Save.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. and click Rename. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 443 . double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . right-click {3D}.

you specify the location. date range. You can create a still. USA.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Click the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . click . click . 9 In the Name dialog. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. For the Multi-Day solar study. select Los Angeles. and time range. enter Summer Solstice. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. you specify the location. USA is selected. Los Angeles. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. For this study. click click OK. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. and time.Boston. leave the slider at 50. and click OK. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. date. CA. MA. expand 3D Views.Creating Solar Studies . You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. expand Views (all). 2 On the View Control Bar. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 4 For Sun Position. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 10 Under Place. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. and click Duplicate. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. or multi-day solar study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. for City. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. single-day.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. For the Single-Day solar study.

16 In the Name dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Los Angeles. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. confirm that Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Frame. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the View Control Bar. click OK. click . and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select December 22. For Time Range. click . 14 In this case. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 445. click OK. Los Angeles. Under Frame. 2008. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Save.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.Courtyard View is currently displayed. ■ For Time Interval. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 10 and press ENTER. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 19 On the File menu. select June 22. select Winter Solstice. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 2008. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 7 On the Options Bar. for Sun Position. 8 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. on the Single-Day tab. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 445 . and click Duplicate. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles is selected. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Clear Ground Plane at Level. enter Winter Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . for Date. and click OK.

click To play the animation from start to finish. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. The solar study animation plays. under Floor Plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. for Sun Position. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 14 On the Options Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click To display the next sequential frame. . click . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file.■ To display the next key frame. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Los Angeles. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click . click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Text. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab.

Exporting the Study as AVI | 447 . click . as shown. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Lines. approximately as shown. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 6 On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Click and enter Dining. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 8 For Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. On the Options Bar.

NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select the section box. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. select Section Boxes. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Frame Range. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Output Length. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. On the Annotation Categories tab. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. Los Angeles. ■ For Frames per second.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 14 Click outside of the section box. click OK. as shown. and enter 5 to 50. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. On the Annotation Categories tab. verify that the value is set to 15. 15 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. if necessary.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. To maintain the proportions of the frame. Los Angeles. and click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. select Winter Solstice. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. Click OK. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click . Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Under Format. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Dimensions. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. you open each image.Los Angeles. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. or frame. click OK. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog.■ ■ Under Format. for Model Graphics Style. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. of the animation separately. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Files of Type. For File Name. and click OK. for Compressor. Exporting a Study as PNG | 449 . To view the animation. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Output Length. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. on the Single-Day tab. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 449. and enter 5 to 10. for Model Graphics Style. For Frames per second. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. enter 450 in the first field (width). 3 For Sun Position. verify that the value is set to 15. select AVI Files. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . select Frame Range. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.

■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. such as JPEG. TIFF. BMP. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.Los Angeles. click Save. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For File name. or GIF.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . enter 450 in the first field (width). select PNG. as shown: 9 On the File menu.■ For Dimensions. under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. depending on the Frame Range. or any single-frame format. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. 8 Click Save. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In this example. click the Desktop icon. For Files of Type. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 451 . as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.

and click OK. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. specify 2:00 pm. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. select One week. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click OK. MA. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. On the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Select the roof. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Boston. for Sun Position. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. USA. and click Duplicate. for File name enter 2pm . clear Section Boxes. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and on the View Control Bar. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. For Time Interval. click the Multi-Day tab. 8 On the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . For Time. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 12 In the Name dialog.Week Interval. click OK.

under Floor Plans. click OK.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for File Name. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and click OK. Click the Desktop icon. you mirror all model elements. model views. and click Save. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. double-click 01 Entry.West or North . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Mirroring the Project In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and annotations in non-drafting views. select Full Frames (Uncompressed).South. In the Length/Format dialog. 17 On the View Control Bar. When you mirror a project. such as East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Re-orienting the Project | 453 . Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. for Compressor. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

right-click. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. The project is mirrored along the East .West axis.West.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. Then. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 6 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. In this exercise. under 3D Views. and click OK. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 5 In the warning dialog. For additional information. select East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select the roof. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 2 In the drawing area.

click . click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. For example. click the Still tab. 5 For Sun Position. specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. 10 Under Date and Time. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 For Sun Position. 8 For Sun Position.3 On the View Control Bar. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 455 . change the time back to 12:00 PM. 12 Under Date and Time. click . and click OK. select Summer Solstice. select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. on the Still tab. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click Apply. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.

click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. select True North. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. right click 01 Entry. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. under Floor Plans. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. and click OK. click OK. 456 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 On the View Control Bar. click the Still tab. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. When a project is started. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. the view settings must be set for True North. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and select Winter Solstice. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and click OK. click . 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 15 For Sun Position. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. for Orientation.

Orienting to True North | 457 . click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.■ To establish the True North direction.

Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. right-click. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click . 27 In the Rename View dialog. for Orientation. and click Properties. select Project North. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select True North Orientation. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Still tab. and click OK. 33 For Sun Position. under 3D Views. right-click 01 Entry. select Summer Solstice. 458 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 32 On the View Control Bar.23 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. enter True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. right-click. select True North. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. and click Apply. and click OK.

click Summer Solstice. In the Length/Format dialog. For Files of Type. click the Single-Day tab. for Dimensions. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Orienting to True North | 459 . Los Angeles.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Format. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Desktop icon. enter 600 in the first field. verify that AVI Files is selected. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. for Compressor. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click OK. and click OK. For File Name. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. Click OK. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Click Save. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. select Medium. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. for Setting. for Scheme. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. under Settings. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. and exporting it as a JPEG image.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. under Quality. 2 In the Project Browser.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Edit/New. and click OK. and 2:00 PM. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397 for additional information on rendering. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. click Render. In this exercise. under 3D Views. 460 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. select Winter Solstice. select Interior: Sun only. Under Lighting. For Sun. capturing it. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. (Show Rendering Dialog). In the Name dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and click Duplicate. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. Since a rendered image is temporary. select 12/22.

enter living area_winter solstice. click Save to Project. click Desktop. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. click Export. For Files of type. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 461 .6 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Save To Project dialog.

462 .

you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. sections. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. an outside reviewer. type. In this tutorial. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 397. however. For the realistic approach. you explore the stylistic approach. or the client. When organizing presentation graphics. and section boxes. Using the pre-built building model. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. a consultant. elevations. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 463 . Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. In this series of exercises. advanced model graphics. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. length. Co-house. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. and details. They include rendering. you can choose between realism and stylistics. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. linework. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Other tools in the software. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project.

To fit the floor plan into the analytique.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of the plan. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a presentation floor plan.

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 465 . and click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and click Rename.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Cnst. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Cnst. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. UP Text. navigate to the folder of your choice. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. expand the Stairs category. click the Scale control and select 1/8" = 1’ 0". and Up Arrow.rvt. name the project i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Annotation Categories tab. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . dimensions. exit the menu. 8 Click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 11 In the Save As directory. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. this represents the view getting smaller. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area.TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Down Arrow. No annotations display in the view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. sections. and other annotations in this view. elevations. and click Save. click in the drawing area. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 466. and clear DOWN Text. 7 Under Visibility.

Within a project. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Place tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Boston. For Sun Position.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can create. double-click it in the Project Browser. 3 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. modify. 6 Under Settings. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click . The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 467 . specify 35. MA. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. select Cast Shadows. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click OK. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. click . select By Date.rvt. Time and Place. on the Still tab. 9 For City. ■ For Contrast. At that place. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 For Place. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. The higher the number. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. the darker the shadows.

most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. . Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click OK. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Cnst.NOTE For this step. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click OK. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. If you select a different city. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 10/27. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. however. you can select any city. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. and click OK. and select 1st Flr. 1:00 PM. under Settings. click (Shadows On). click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. 12 Click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

right-click the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.19 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Add View. select Arch D 36 x 24 Portrait. and click View. click Sheet. 4 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 469. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 469 . 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click to place it. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation. select No. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. click . 12 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and notice the view title. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Show Title. The viewport no longer displays a view title. under Graphics. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. For this analytique. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. To accomplish this.

You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. and the boundary of the region. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When you finish drawing the chain. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. If necessary. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 20 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click . 17 In the Type Selector. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. click Filled Region. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. and click Activate View. fill properties. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 471 . you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. select Invisible lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click . 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 18 On the Options Bar.

click Region Properties. enter Solid Black. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click Deactivate View. click .22 On the Design Bar. for Sheet Name. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 30 On the Design Bar. click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. for Fill Pattern. enter Presentation. click Finish Sketch. and click View Properties. under Name. and click OK. scroll down. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click Duplicate. under Graphics. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. and click OK. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click Edit/New. and click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 472. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 473 . Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Pattern Overrides. 18 For Time. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Visibility. click Duplicate.2 In the Project Browser. 13 For Contrast. specify 2:30 PM. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click in the drawing area. scroll up. and click OK. enter Presentation South Elevation. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click in the Walls row. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Model Categories tab. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 For Sun Position. Time and Place. click . under Settings. 9 Click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. exit the menu. clear Visible. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 12 Under Shadow. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and clear Elevation Swing. under Elevations. click OK. click Override. select Cast Shadows. and click Rename. expand the Doors category. specify 35. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. right-click Copy of South. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click (Shadows Off). 11 On the View Control Bar. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select By Date. under Visibility. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 475. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.rvt. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click Add View. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 475 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A106 . and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.

select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 477 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Modify. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 477. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 7 On the Design Bar.

Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Section.0". TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select 1/8" = 1'. under Floor Plans.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 3 On the Options Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. for Scale. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Cnst. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr.

click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique. expand Sections (Callout 1). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 479 . Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily.0". and double-click Section 2. as shown. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view.Section 2 is added to the building model. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1/8" = 1'. this view needs to be rotated 180°. To accomplish this. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Pattern Overrides. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. and click Rename. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Walls row. right-click Callout of Section 2. click Override. click the Model Categories tab. click Modify. expand the Doors category. 15 Under Visibility. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 17 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. 12 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. enter Presentation Section 2. clear Visible. scroll up.

The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. click The crop regions no longer display. 22 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click OK. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 481 . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 482. When you select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. (Hide Crop Region).

enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 6 In the Name dialog. click . In the steps that follow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify the following: Under Shadow. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. ■ For Sun Position. in the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. For Contrast. specify 35. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Presentation Section 2. The shadows do not offer much contrast. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). click Duplicate. In addition. 2 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply.rvt. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

select Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 484. For Altitude. click (Shadows On). Click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. click OK. Select Relative to View. was added to this training file for training purposes. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. For Azimuth. for Silhouette style. and click OK. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. select Directly. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The line style. specify 70°. specify 135°. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 483 . TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view.Presentation. double-click A106 .rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). click Add View.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. The view title no longer displays. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. under Sections (Callout 1). specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.5 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Edit toolbar. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 6 On the Design Bar. Using a clock as a reference. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 485 . 8 Select the callout that you added previously. click (Rotate). double-click Section 2. select Viewport : Presentation. To rotate an object. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius. click Modify. In the steps that follow. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.

Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.The callout rotates 180°. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A106 . 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.Presentation.

14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 487. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template | 487 . After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

under Sections (Type 1).rvt. under Sections (Type 1). 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . right-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation. click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 4 In the View Templates dialog. right-click Copy of Section 1. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation Section 1. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Activate View. under Graphics. select 90° Counterclockwise. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lighting fixtures. for Rotation on Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Presentation. double-click A106 . and click OK. and click OK. click Add View. and click Deactivate View. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. annotations. 15 Right-click the viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template | 489 . 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Names. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and elevation swings no longer display. The furniture.

490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 490.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital.

click Callout. After you add the callout. under Sections (Type 1). select the callout. double-click Section 1. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Working in a Callout Analytique | 491 . Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. click Modify. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 1. as shown. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.

clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 Select the crop region. clear Annotation Crop. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.5 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Callout. double-click Presentation Callout. and click View Properties. as shown. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. and click OK. under Extents.

click Add View. and click Activate View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. specify 22. select Custom. double-click A106 . select Section: Presentation Callout. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Views dialog. For Scale Value 1. Working in a Callout Analytique | 493 . Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. select Viewport : Presentation. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.

and click Deactivate View. and make adjustments as necessary. In the steps that follow. click Edit/New. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. and move it to the position shown below. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Filled Region. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. When finished. activate the viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Region Properties. 23 On the Design Bar. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base.

Working in a Callout Analytique | 495 . 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms.Presentation. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. double-click A106 . 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. You do not have to replicate the image exactly.25 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. and click Activate View. click . When you are finished. under Sheets (all). select Solid fill. and click OK 3 times. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 28 In the Project Browser. on the Design Bar.

click . 32 On the Design Bar. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 34 Select the crop region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click (Show Crop Region). click Finish Sketch. 33 On the View Control Bar.

38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 497 . You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 497. and click Deactivate View. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.35 On the View Control Bar.

click the Scale control. and click 1" = 20'-0".rvt. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. under 3D Views. and apply shadows to the views. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 5 On the View Control Bar. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

right-click Isometric 1. Select Relative to View. right-click Copy of Isometric 1.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. A section box displays around the building model. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. select Silhouette Edges. for Silhouette style. For Contrast. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 499 . under 3D Views. Click OK. click . and click Rename. select Directly. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For Altitude. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Select Ground Plane at Level. For Sun Position. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click Isometric 2. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. select Section Box. and click OK. specify 135°. Select 1st Flr. right-click Isometric. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. specify 35. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. For Azimuth. click Duplicate. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Extents. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. specify 45°. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. in the list. Cnst.

When you are finished. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. as shown. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box.19 Select the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

under 3D Views. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Isometric 2. clear Section Boxes. 24 In the Project Browser. The section box no longer displays. If desired. 29 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. and click OK. 27 Select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. the stairs and railings may display. double-click Isometric 2. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and click OK. double-click Isometric 3. click Modify on the Design Bar. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 22 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. under 3D Views. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. you can adjust the plane location.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 21 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 501 . under 3D Views. enter Isometric 3. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. make a copy of the view. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 23 In the Rename View dialog. When you are finished.

drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. In the Type Selector. 31 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. 33 In the Project Browser. double-click A106 . select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under Sheets (all). 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown.Next. In the Type Selector.Presentation. 32 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under 3D Views. The filled region partially covers the view.

35 Select the poche filled region. select Transparent. 40 Click OK twice. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 41 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 36 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. The image below shows the redrawn lines. click Edit. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. This will make it easier to draw lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 503 . 39 For Background. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. and click Activate View. On the Options Bar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fill Patterns. click Region Properties. select Concrete.

and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit/New. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 505. 45 In the Type Properties dialog.43 On the Design Bar. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 46 Click OK twice. select Solid fill. for Fill Pattern.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 505 . double-click 1st Flr. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Cnst. click Camera. you add it to the presentation sheet. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. The view opens immediately. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. under Floor Plans. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. a cutaway perspective view. then you specify the eye direction and range. you create the final view for the analytique. i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

and click OK. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Name. 506 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Silhouette style. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Contrast. select Silhouette Edges. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). and click OK. click . specify 35. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. For Sun Position.

and click OK. 12 Select the section box. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Extents. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 507 . A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. select Viewport : Presentation. clear Section Boxes. click Size. and click OK. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. In the Type Selector. click (Hide Crop Region). you must specify the actual size of the image. 508 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Change. 18 On the View Control Bar. double-click A106 . 15 On the Options Bar. enter 6 1/2".Presentation. for Width. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. select Scale (locked proportions).14 Select the crop region. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 19 To hide the section box. 21 In the Project Browser.

Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select the same font as the title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. enter Title. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A106 . specify a text size of 1 1/2". specify a text size of 1/4". 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. enter Description. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. select a font.Presentation sheet is not the active view. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. select Text : Title. Annotating the Analytique on page 509. click Text. click Edit/New.rvt. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Text. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique | 509 . i_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click .

510 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Text : Description.

Importing and Exporting 511 .

512 .

curtain walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. such as walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. In this tutorial. you create a small building from the front mass form. that compose the building. Once the model has been imported. 513 . and roofs. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. After you import the SketchUp model.

click OK. select SketchUp Files. visible elements. select All.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. click the Massing tab. click Training Files. For Files of type. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. For Import units. click Browse. For Colors. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. buildings. select Preserve. enter Import SketchUp. and click Save. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and not in the library. for File name. or select from a list. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Auto-Detect. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 10 In the Name dialog.rte. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. under Template file. click OK. For Layers. enter SketchUp Model. click Create Mass. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\default. you create a Revit Architecture project. and click OK. ■ 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 9 In the informational dialog.skp. Click the Sketchup file. Double-click the Common folder. 4 In the New Project dialog. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

and roofs. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ For Positioning. select Level 1. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 17 In the warning dialog. such as walls. Click Open. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. select Manual .Center. click . In a new project. For Place at level. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. click the Close button. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 515 .You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. curtain walls. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. Level 1 is the only choice. depending on the complexity of the project.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 516. that compose the building. such as walls. and roofs. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.18 Proceed to the next exercise. curtain walls.12'' displays. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. select the face so that it highlights in red. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Basic Roof: Generic . and on the View Control Bar. click Roof by Face. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. After you create the building from the mass faces. verify Level 2 is selected. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . for Level. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

A roof is created from the mass face. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. on the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. To see the new roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. verify that Select Multiple is selected. on the Options Bar. click to display masses. 6 On the Options Bar.

518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 12 On the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. 14 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click roofs that you created.15 On the Design Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Wall by Face. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. verify Basic Wall: Generic .8'' displays. 23 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. select Core Face: Exterior. for Loc Line. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Modify to end the command.

25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 5' x 10' displays. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. click to view only the walls and roofs.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 31 Using the same technique. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.

and on the Options Bar. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. select the other wall. click Wall by Face. click Create System. and on the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. 38 Select the mass face shown below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 522 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . press TAB until the desired wall highlights.35 On the Design Bar. and select it. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below.

double-click Level 1. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Below the right corner of the view. click to view the building that you have created. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. under Floor Plans. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. click Wall by Face. click Camera. specify a point to place the camera.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 523 . and select the mass face shown below.

roofs. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 48 On the View toolbar. The perspective view created by the camera displays. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. as shown. 524 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Click the frame to display its grips. to view only the walls. click your building in the view. specify a point for the camera target. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again.

52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. click Modify. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 525 . select Center. 50 On the Options Bar. click . and select the left curtain system in the view. Under Grid 1 Pattern. select Center. Under Grid 2 Pattern. Click OK.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. for Justification. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ .

60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. and click Cancel to end the command. verify Single-Flush: 36'' x 84'' displays. 526 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Door. 63 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. 55 Right-click. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click 3D View 1. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and move the roof edges as shown below. 56 In the Project Browser. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 59 On the View toolbar.54 Select each roof to display its grips.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 527 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

528 .

Using Advanced Features 529 .

530 .

For example. 531 . they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you select the grid. To change grids. This affects the entire curtain system. or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. and you can change these elements individually. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Unlike windows. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. and they are not windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you need to change the length of the wall.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and mullions. Like windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you need to select a panel. panel. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Like walls. To switch panel types. grid lines.

expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and open Imperial\i_Curtain_Walls. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and double-click Ground Floor. 4 In the Type Selector.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.

7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. and click (Properties).11 Select the curtain system. top constraint. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . using curtain grids. enter 4'0". The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. Click OK. top and base attachments. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. For Top Offset. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.

click Elevation. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 4'0" above the ground floor level line. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and resize the crop boundary as shown.a. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Creating an Entrance | 535 . and click Rename. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 20 In the drawing area. click Curtain Grid. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1 . and click OK.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 23 Place another grid 5'0" above the first grid.

one larger than the other. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. FIFTH FLOOR. click Modify. 26 While pressing CTRL. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. THIRD FLOOR. and click OK. FOURTH FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. while pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 25 On the Design Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . SIXTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. and SEVENTH FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels.

and then select the segment above it. click Add or Remove Segments. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. click Modify. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Next. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and on the Options Bar. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Creating an Entrance | 537 . 33 On the Design Bar. Instead of using the Door command. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed. Click to place another grid line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. you add a doorway to the curtain system.32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel.

The two segments are removed. and lock them. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 Using the same method. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. click Curtain Grid. select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 39 On the Design Bar.

The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 4'0" above the ground floor. Creating an Entrance | 539 . You now have two 6-foot wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 43 Delete the dimensions. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Do not click between the 6-foot panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid).TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. Use the following image as a guide. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click in any white space to exit the editor. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.

This changes the graphics style of the Next. under Floor Plans. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. Now. under Elevations. 57 On the View Control Bar. . 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 54 On the Design Bar. you replace the 2 larger 6-foot panels with curtain system doors. The panel changes to a double door. 51 Select the left 6-foot panel. click Training Files. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click Wireframe. not as curtain panels. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. These panels schedule as doors. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. and open Imperial\Families\Doors\Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 56 In the Project Browser. They are part of the curtain panel category. 55 In the Project Browser. click view. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Entrance Elevation. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click Modify. click Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door.rfa. on the new curtain system you added. 52 On the Type Selector. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.Next.

click System Panel : Solid. 61 With the panel still selected. 62 In the Element Properties dialog.60 On the Type Selector. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 65 On the View Control Bar. click . click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The glazed panels display in blue. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 63 Click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 541 .

however. click Save As. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. select Grid Line Segment. clickModify. so you remove them next. Name the file i_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.68 On the File menu. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors.rvt. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 4'0" above the ground floor. select Entire Grid Line. there are a few that you do not want. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 10 Delete the mullions below them. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. because their width reduces the size of the doors. you place mullions on curtain panel grids.

You are going to change some mullion joins. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 543 . Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Two mullion join controls display. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 14 Click the top mullion control.

under Floor Plans. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. double-click Southeast Isometric. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. you add a curtain system using the wall command. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 17 Save the file. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 15 On the Design Bar. 5 Click . The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. click Wall. Finally. 4 In the Type Selector. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. click Modify. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Finally. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 16 In the Project Browser. you can also right-click.

click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. enter 4'0". 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. For Top Offset. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 545 . for Top Constraint. (Arc passing through three points). 7 On the Options Bar. Click OK.6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Next. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system. Divide the halves into quarters. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. and then sixteenths. double-click East. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 14 In the Project Browser. You are going to use one of these snaps points. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. eighths. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder.

16 On the Design Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next. you change some panels in the system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. select the bottom layer of panels. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. click Modify. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 547 .12" . select Basic Wall: Generic . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 18 In the Type Selector.

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 3 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines, and on the Options Bar, for Depth, enter 4". 6 On the Options Bar, click .

7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.

8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 9 Select the extrusion, and click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory, select Glass, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines. 12 On the Options Bar, clear Chain, and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. .

548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the family as Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel - Pattern.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fourth floor panels are selected. 21 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Panel - Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 23 Right-click, and click Change Walls Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar, click 25 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.

27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector, select System Panel - Solid. All the panels change to the solid panel.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 549

The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
In this exercise, you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel, except at the GROUND FLOOR level.

For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\Profile.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog, for Profile Usage, select Mullion, and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar:

Click

(Polygon). , and select it.

If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar, click
■ ■

For Sides, enter 8. Select Radius, and enter 2" for the radius.

10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.

11 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 13 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Fine, and click OK. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Cylinder Mullion - detail.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 551

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Select the detail component, and click Visibility. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.rfa. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close, and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded, it can be added as a mullion type. 27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 28 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels).

29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 31 Click .

32 In the Element Properties dialog, select Circular Mullion for Family. 33 Click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name, and click OK. 36 Under Construction, for Profile, select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice. 38 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones. 41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click, and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE.

44 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson, you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and then apply those custom elements to the system.

Additional Curtain Systems
In this lesson, you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system, a storefront system, and a ruled curtain system.

Additional Curtain Systems | 553

Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.

7 On the Design Bar, click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Family, select System Family: Sloped Glazing. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level, enter 2' 0". Click OK.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar, select Entire Grid Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.

Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model.

Storefront System | 555

You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 8' 0". 6 Start the wall 4' 0" from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.

7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.

556 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

The curtain wall cuts the original wall.

8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 34' 0", and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 12 Select the storefront wall, and click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. For this wall, the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing, and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 5' 0". This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 5’ 0". The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance, and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 8'0". This means that the panel heights will be exactly 8', even if the wall height changes. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters, click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number

Storefront System | 557

is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 15. 16 Click OK.

17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion. 18 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid.

20 Save the file. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise, you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

Curtain System by Lines
In this exercise, you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Training File

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.

558 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level, and highlight the model line.

Curtain System by Lines | 559

8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Select the panel, and click .

Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.

560 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems

13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves, quarters, and then eighths. Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system, and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system, embed a curtain system inside another wall, and define a ruled curtain system.

Curtain System by Lines | 561

562

Roofs

15
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, mansard, and low sloped roofs. In this lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this exercise, you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Creating Roofs

Creating an Extruded Roof

You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

Training File

Click File menu ➤ Open.

563

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

564 | Chapter 15 Roofs

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. centerline. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. click the blue square on the witness line. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and so on). This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 565 .TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.

sketch the roof profile.Next. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press CTRL. press TAB. and select the second wall. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the exterior face of the wall. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click Modify. Creating an Extruded Roof | 567 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. expand Views (all).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and double-click Section 1. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Type 1). Next. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.

26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 568. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. click Pick Walls. sketch the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). and double-click Garage Roof. 3 In the Project Browser.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Next. 5 On the Options Bar. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and click Yes. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 569 . expand Floor Plans. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. verify that Defines slope is selected.

570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . clear Defines slope. 11 Press CTRL. Next. click the model. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. select both slope definition lines. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 571. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. and click OK. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. 15 On the View toolbar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 14 When you see the informational dialog. By default. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Dimensions.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar.

6 Click to select all the walls. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. sketch the chimney opening.rvt. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. expand Views (all). clear Defines slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 571 . you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. click Pick Walls. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 3 On the Options Bar. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. Next. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. When you complete the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. press TAB.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. i_Roofs. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

18 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. click (Rectangle). click Finish Roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. click Modify. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 15 On the Options bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 8 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 9 Using automatic snaps.

Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 7 On the Options Bar.19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click (Pick Lines). select Defines slope. and double-click Level 2. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). clear Defines Slope. Next.rvt. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 573. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 573 . you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. i_Roofs. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans.

trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof Properties. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Finish Roof. raise the roof 2' above the current level. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Next. 14 Under Constraints. and click OK. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical slope definition line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 11 To trim the first line segment. using the following illustration for guidance. click (Trim/Extend). 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.

17 On the View toolbar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 18 On the Design Bar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 575 . (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.16 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 21 Click (SteeringWheels).

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 25 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 576. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Next. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. i_Roofs.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.

Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. 9 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. you add a slope-defining line. 4 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. press TAB. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 10 To trim the first line segment. Next. select the left vertical roof line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.1 In the Project Browser. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 577 .

click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 19 On the View toolbar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. and double-click Level 2. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. expand Views (all). (SteeringWheels). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. i_Roofs. 16 Under Constraints. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and double-click 3D. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578. select Defines slope. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click 20 On the View toolbar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. and press ENTER. 13 On the Options Bar. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand 3D Views.

Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you need to add two reference planes. 11 On the Design Bar. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 14 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. click Slope Arrow. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. To help locate the position of each split. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 579 . Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. add two new slope arrows. 7 On the Options Bar. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail.15 to add the second slope arrow. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Next. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 12 On the Options Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. Before you can add slope arrows. clear Defines Slope. click (Pick Lines).5 On the View menu. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Split Walls and Lines. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 9 On the Tools menu.

use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. (Properties). When you sketch a hip roof. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 3 On the Options Bar. 18 Press CTRL. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. enter 12'' for Rise/12". (Properties). 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Under Dimensions. select both slope arrows.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Align Eaves. and then click OK. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 580. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and double-click Garage Roof. click Edit. on the Options Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the adjacent eave heights must align. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. select Slope for Specify. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. i_Roofs. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. When eave heights differ. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. The eave lines display with a dimension. under Dimensions. and move the cursor to place the arrow. enter 6'' for Rise/12". When aligning eaves. expand Views (all). 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Defines Slope. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.

Next. 12 On the Design Bar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 14 If you want to save your changes. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 581. click Save As. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof | 581 . click Finish Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. on the File menu. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select a method to align the eaves. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.

expand Floor Plans. 3 Select the roof and. 7 In the Project Browser. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model.1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and double-click North. expand Views (all). Next. 6 On the View toolbar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Elevations. and double-click Level 3. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. under Constraints. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. (Properties). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

10 On the Options Bar. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. on the File menu. press TAB. click . 14 On the Options Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. click (Pick Lines). click Save As. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 584. Creating a Mansard Roof | 583 . 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. and save the exercise file with a unique name. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 17 On the View toolbar. and then select Defines slope. click Modify. enter 3'' for Rise/12". 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click mansard roof. and click OK. under Dimensions.

click Training Files. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. you add a roof to a building shell. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Floor Plans. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof.rvt. After you add the roof. 3 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 7 On the Tools toolbar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. Because the walls are not continuous. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click (Trim/Extend). 5 In the drawing area. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 .4 On the Options Bar.

Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. and click OK. select Steel Truss .EPDM. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. for Type. click Roof Properties.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Finish Roof.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. double-click the section head to open the section view. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line.The roof has been created. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. In the next steps. click (Draw Split Lines). and click to select it. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 587 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 Move the cursor down.

move the cursor horizontally to the left. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. (Add points). and select a point on the opposite roof line.You create a split line vertically down the center. 20 Using the same method. Next. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. on the Options Bar. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.

You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 589 . 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. for the dimension.In this exercise. exact placement of the points is not important. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. 23 On the Options Bar. enter -2''. and press ENTER. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.

590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. click Modify. enter 4''. 29 On the Design Bar. and select all of the roof edges. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. for Elevation. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 27 Press and hold CTRL.

for the Thermal/Air Layer. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 591 . leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Click OK 3 times. select Variable. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. click Edit/New. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. By making the insulation layer variable. 31 Select the roof slab. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. for Structure. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. click Edit. 36 View the results in the section view. In some cases this type of slope is desired. The entire slab is sloped.

you learn how to create roof fascia. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 5 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click (Properties). click Training Files. and soffits. and click Open. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Fascia-Built-Up. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Press CTRL. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . After you create a roof. click Save As. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits In this lesson. and Soffits on page 592.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. click Training Files. 37 If you want to save your changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. gutters.rfa. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. on the File menu. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Gutters. you can easily create its fascia. Gutters. Creating Fascia. gutters. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rvt. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. and open Common\c_Condominium.

12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 8 In the Name dialog. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.7 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. under Construction. click Duplicate. Creating Roof Fascia | 593 . 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters on page 594. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

10 Click to place the gutter.rvt. 594 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and click OK. 3 In the Properties dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click (Properties). 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK three times. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value field for Material. under Construction.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. c_Condominium. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. . click Edit/New.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. Creating Soffits In this exercise. and double-click Roof. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. expand Views. Creating Soffits | 595 . Creating Soffits on page 595. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click Pick Roofs.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Select the roof. 596 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. 5 On the Design Bar.

9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating Soffits | 597 . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

598 .

you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. View predefined area schemes 1 In the Project Browser. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. 599 .Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. expand Views (all). click Settings. right-click in the Design Bar. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and click Room and Area. expand Floor Plans. In the final exercise. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. your values will be different. Finally. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. If you are using metric units. 2 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click the Area Schemes tab. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Area.

click the Room Calculations tab. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. click Area Plan. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Click OK. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. These schemes define spatial relationships. 7 In the New Area Plan dialog. the system-computed height defaults to the level. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. or 0. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. it is not necessary in this exercise. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 5 Click Cancel. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to 4 feet or above the level. 4 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Create a gross building area plan 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line.

When you select Yes in this dialog. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must manually add these boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. click Area.8 When the informational dialog displays. To modify the area. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. common areas. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 601 . and store area. forming a closed loop. under Views (all). Next. 11 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. rather than the area tag. If you select No. 13 In the New Area Plan dialog. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you must select one of the reference lines. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area Plan. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Click OK. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines.

you can either draw them or pick them.14 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. When you pick the walls. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 18 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 20 In the upper left corner of the building model. 19 On the Design Bar. Add area boundary lines 16 On the Design Bar. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. When you add area boundary lines. click Area Boundary. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). If you do not select this option.

do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.21 On the Design Bar. 26 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. click Area. click Modify and select the area. Click OK. and click to select the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 603 . click Modify. 22 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click ■ ■ ■ . 27 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar.

604 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . enter Core for Name. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 31 Add an area to the building model core. Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click ■ ■ ■ . In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type.28 On the Options Bar. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.

33 On the File menu. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 605 . and click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. and click to place the legend. name the project Area-in progress.Notice that within the two store areas. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 34 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.rvt. click Color Scheme Legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In the next exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

click Schedule/Quantities. 606 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.3 When the dialog displays. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 Under Available fields. under Category.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 607 .

608 .

Using Massing Tools In this lesson. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. At any time. After you make building elements. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. floor. or both. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and floors. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You assign the default wall. and perimeter information. you then need to update the building face. 609 . You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. After creating mass floors. floors. roofs. building elements. If you modify a massing face. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. In this tutorial. curtain systems. and roofs. volume.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Start. and cutting geometry. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. double-click Level 1. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Create Mass. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. under Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Training Files.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and click Massing. The Design Bar title changes to Mass.rvt. sweeps. under Floor Plans.

click Extrusion Properties. click 18 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. (Pick Lines). (Line). Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. double-click Level 1. and click OK. for Extrusion End. 15 On the View Control Bar. for Offset. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and click . click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 5'0". and on the Options Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 5 feet from the position you pick with the cursor. 12 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Materials and Finishes. and on the Options Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 10 In the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. click (Default 3D View). click Lines. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 611 . 13 On the View toolbar. enter 80'0". select Mass (Opaque).6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. for Name. click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar.

25 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Materials dialog. for Name.20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. double-click West. select Pick a plane. enter 80'0". click Extrusion Properties. 28 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Mass (Transparent). 26 In the Project Browser. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. highlight the larger form. 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. The second form is on top of the first form. for Extrusion End. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. under Views (all). Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 30 In the drawing area. and click . under Materials and Finishes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 90'0". 29 In the Work Plane dialog. click the value for Material. under Views (all). 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . for Extrusion Start. and click OK. and click OK.

click (Draw). you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click Lines.TIP If necessary. 31 Click to select the face. (Pick Lines). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. and clear Chain. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 613 . 34 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. press TAB to highlight the entire face. and on the Options Bar.

39 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and delete the vertical construction line. click (Arc passing through three points). 37 On the Options Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Modify. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. TIP If you do not see this option. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click (Move).36 Sketch a line 19 feet up as shown.

click (Default 3D View). 52 On the Design Bar. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 45 In the Project Browser.Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 50 On the Design Bar. and that -300'0" is specified for Second End. 46 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). (Arc passing through three points). (Line). click Blend Properties. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. click Lines and. click Finish Sketch. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 On the Options Bar. double-click East. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 615 . click Edit Top. 53 On the View toolbar. for Material.

In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. In the next exercise.rvt. click Ref Plane. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 616. select the mass. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.54 Proceed to the next exercise. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. i_Massing_Start. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the drawing area. under Views (all). you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. double-click Level 1.

on the View Control Bar. place 3 more reference planes 50' apart from left to right. click (Line). NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. and place the first reference plane 50' to the right. enter 40'0" and for Extrusion Start. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 14 Under Constraints. click (Default 3D View). 9 On the Design Bar. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 0. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 7 Using the same technique. 6 Place another reference plane 50' to the right of the first reference plane. 17 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and select Chain. click (Pick Lines) and enter 50' for Offset. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. for Extrusion End. 15 Click OK. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. When sketching each extrusion.4 On the Options bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 617 . 16 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Finish Sketch. snap the corners to the intersections. click Lines.

Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. and click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Using Swept Blends In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. i_Massing_Start. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. double-click Level 1. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path.rvt. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.In this exercise. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing.

The only way to align these elements is visually. Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 6 On the Design Bar.■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. click Finish Path. ■ For the radius. Using Swept Blends | 619 . select a point below the mass elements.

click Lines. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click Finish Profile. 11 On the Options Bar. click Profile 1. and click Edit. click (Align). 9 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and press ESC. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend.Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. and sketch a 20' x 20' rectangle on the face of the mass. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click Profile 2. click (Rectangle). click (Default 3D View). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 On the Design Bar. as shown.

click Swept Blend Properties. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. as shown: ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 22 Click OK twice. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Swept Blend. 23 On the Design Bar. click <By Category>. Using Swept Blends | 621 . and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Finish Profile. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click .17 Using the same method.

25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 26 Save the file as i_Massing_Complete. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.rvt. Finally. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Finish Mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. In this exercise.24 On the Design Bar. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.

and for Name. enter 60'0". 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. enter 40'0". for Width. 7 Click New. and click Apply. and click OK. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Click OK. and for Name. and click OK. enter 225' x 30' x 60'. In this exercise. enter 35'0". click Family Types. for Height. 5 Click New. enter 60'0". enter 15'0". under Other. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Height. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and open Imperial\Families\Massing\Box. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 150'0". enter 30'0". for Depth. 8 For Width. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types | 623 . for Depth. enter 150' x 15' x 35'. 3 In the Name dialog. click New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. enter 50'0". and click Apply. and click Apply. for Depth.rfa. enter 50' x 60' x 40'. for Height. enter 225'0". 6 For Width.

under Floor Plans.rfa family files.rvt. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and Triangle. click Training Files. under Views (all). double-click Site. You also load other existing mass families and place them.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Box-Training: 225' x 30' x 60'. 8 In the Type Selector. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 Open the Box-Training.rfa. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. Semi Barrel Vault. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. on the View toolbar. 3 On the View Control Bar. and open the Imperial\Families\Massing folder. and open Imperial\i_Massing_In-place. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Place Mass.rfa. Arc Dome. click Training Files. 1 If not already selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click (Element Properties). and click to place the mass. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click (Element Properties). 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. for the Material parameter. and on the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40'. 17 Press CTRL. 24 On the Design Bar. select the 3 boxes. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 625 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. select the triangle. click Place Mass.10 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. as shown. click Modify. 14 In the Type Selector. select Triangle: 50' x 150' x 35'. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. specify Mass (Transparent). 20 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the drawing area. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. and click OK twice. 11 Select the box.

30 Place the box mass family as shown. specify Mass (Transparent). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). click Place Mass. and click (Element Properties). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. select Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35'. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing .26 Select the triangle. 29 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. for the Material parameter. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View).

NOTE When you join geometry. (Join Geometry). In the next exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Training File ■ Continue using the i_Massing_In-place. Joining Mass Elements | 627 . In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.rvt file. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.

4 Select the triangle.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' mass element as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). under Views (all). Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 50' x 60' x 40' as shown.

click (Draw). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 150' x 15' x 35' first. as shown. for Axis.8 On the Options Bar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and then select the triangle. click (Default 3D View). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. enter SM. 17 Press ESC to see the result. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. (Join Geometry). Joining Mass Elements | 629 .

you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. (If Design Options is already selected. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.rvt. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . do not clear the check mark. 1 On the Design Bar.In this exercise. click (Add to Design Option Set). Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_In-place. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Modify. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. and select the triangle mass element. 2 On the Window menu. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.

14 In the drawing area. select Semi Barrel Vault: 35' x 50' x 25'. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. and click OK. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. select Sloped (primary). 8 On the Options Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. 7 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). select Rotate after placement. for Angle. specify Mass (Transparent). click Modify. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 90. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click (Element Properties). 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Mass Elements in Design Options | 631 . under Floor Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Curved. click Place Mass. select Arc Dome: 20'R x 9'H. select the 2 semi barrel vaults.

21 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and watch the status bar. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. specify Mass (Transparent). 23 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and click OK. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click North. and click (Element Properties). under 3D Views. 20 In the drawing area. under Views (all). clear Sloped. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click (Add to Design Option Set). click Modify. TIP To find the correct shapes. 22 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. While pressing CTRL. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 19 On the Design Bar. select Curved. select the three arc domes. and click OK twice.

click (Design Options). and click Close. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. click Make Primary. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 633 . click the Design Options tab. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 33 In the Design Options dialog. select Curved and. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. In this exercise.rvt.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Save As and save the file as i_Massing_Design_Options. 34 Close the warning that displays. you can make it the primary option. 35 On the File menu. under Option. 31 Click the value for Design Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. and click OK. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

under Views (all). click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Wall by Face. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Faces). 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 2 On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. select Wall Centerline. and open Imperial\i_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. click Training Files. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 In the Type Selector. and for Loc Line. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. you pick massing faces to create walls.Brick on CMU. double-click {3D}. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

9 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. 14 In the Project Browser.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 635 . 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face.

19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 9. 20 On the View Control Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry.

6 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 1 In the Project Browser. clear Curtain Panels. click Modify. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 637 . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. When you select levels.In this exercise. perimeter. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise.rvt. Curtain Systems. click Mass Floors. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and click OK. volume. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 Click OK. double-click {3D}. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. select all levels. and exterior surface area. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.

9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Modify. click Mass Floors. 10 Press CTRL. 13 On the Design Bar. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and select the three 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements and the mirrored 150' x 15' x 35' box masses as shown. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Levels 1-4.

NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 15 Press CTRL. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 639 . and click OK.14 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 225' x 30' x 60' box mass element as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. click Mass Floors. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).

In this exercise. press and hold SHIFT. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Level. under Available fields. Floor Perimeter. select Mass Floor. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. Floor Volume. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Floor Area. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 4 Using the same method. and click OK. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. schedules can be created using the mass floors. under Category. and click Add. The Floor Area.

5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. for Usage. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. and click OK. select Mass: Family and Type. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Mass Family Box-Training: 50'x60'x40' Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 641 . for Sort by. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. enter Retail.

under Scheduled fields (in order). expand Schedules/Quantities.Mass Family Box-Training: 150'x15'x35' Box-Training: 225'x30'x60' Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 35'x50'x25' Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. and click Remove. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Other. select Mass: Family and Type. 13 With Usage selected. 14 Select Level. click Edit. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. After you assign usage. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing.

TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. click Edit. and click OK. and click Properties. 24 In the Project Browser. for Field formatting. under Other. under Other. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. for Filter by. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. select Usage. 18 On the Filter tab. select Level. under Fields. elevation. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. and in the field below. select Calculate totals. in the field under Filter by. 22 In the Project Browser. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 643 . and click OK. for Sort by. click Edit. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. for Then by.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 23 In the Rename View dialog. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Floor Area. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and plan views. and select Grand totals. 27 Click OK twice. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 16 On the Formatting tab. enter Hotel.

you created mass floor schedules. by level. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Roof by Face. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . floor perimeter. the floor area. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. The mass floor schedules list. 3 Select the top face of the left 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element as shown. double-click {3D}.

click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 645 . Your model should now look as shown. select Basic Roof : Generic . and also on the top faces of the 150' x 15' x 35' box mass elements. 5 On the Options Bar.12". NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass element family.4 In the Type Selector. click Create Roof.

646 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. Curtain Systems. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Create Roof. In this exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panels. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. select Sloped Glazing. in the Type Selector. and click OK. 13 Using the same method. and Walls. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass.8 Using the method you just learned. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast.

Creating Curtain Systems | 647 . 5 Press CTRL. 6 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. verify that Select Multiple is selected. double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Create System. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System : 5' x 5'.Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all).

create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass.

click Create System. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 649 .9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

you change the size of an existing mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.12 Click Modify to exit the command. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components.rvt.

you resize one of the 50' x 60' x 40' box mass elements. Floors. and then click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. enter 105'0". for Width. and click (Element Properties). 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. double-click Site. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 6 On the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. Next. click Visibility/Graphics. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 651 . and Walls. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). and click OK. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. clear Curtain Panels. Roofs. click Modify. clear Exclude Design Options.

652 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. In the next steps.

press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. you want to select the smaller one. 17 Select the roof as shown.TIP To select the curtain wall. 16 On the View toolbar. Also. click OK. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click (Default 3D View). 14 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 653 . click Remake.

654 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake.

double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 655 . Training File ■ Continue using the file i_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.rvt.20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.

Massing only. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. under 3D Views. 656 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 On the Model Categories tab. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 4 Rename the view 3D . 8 Click None to clear the selection. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. right-click {3D}. 9 Select Mass. 3 In the Project Browser. click All to select all categories.

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. You might create the model shown.In this exercise. to the building shell. This concludes the massing tutorial. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 657 . you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. If desired.

658 .

Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you also simplify the modification process. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. When you make changes to a nested group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. the host group is also updated automatically. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. hotel rooms. you add the new model group to a previously created group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you not only simplify their placement. Creating. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. place. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. For example. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Modifying. By grouping objects. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and modify repetitive units. or with those working on a different project. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and typical office layouts. In this tutorial. 659 . all instances in the building model are updated. In another exercise. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. After you create a model group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You mirror one instance of the group.

and double-click First Floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. enter ZR. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area. expand Views (all).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

Creating and Placing a Group | 661 . enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 7 On the Design Bar. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. select the center control for the group origin.

expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 663 . right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 12 On the Design Bar.

14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Copy. click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 15 On the Options Bar.

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 665 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

as shown. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . one mirrored. click Modify. and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. and click Save. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 667 . 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click to select it. press TAB to highlight the wall. click Save As.

press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). press TAB. 8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).).3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. and click to select the wall. click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.). 7 Click (Group Member.

Modifying a Group | 669 . 11 On the Design Bar. click Door. 14 On the Options Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. move the cursor to the left. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. clear Tag on Placement. click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall.

23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. move the cursor up. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 In the drawing area. In edit group mode. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 20 On the Options Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. All other elements in the model are grayed out.16 On the Design Bar.

click Finish. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. you add the Typical Kitchen group. under Constraints. 25 Select the opening. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. which acts as the host. Nesting Groups In this exercise. created in an earlier lesson. enter 7'.24 On the Design Bar. 28 On the group editor toolbar. for Unconnected Height. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups | 671 . and click OK. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. click Modify. (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click 27 For Base Offset. enter 3' 4''. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.

click Edit Group. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click (Add to Group). i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. in the Project Browser. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor. select the Typical Kitchen group. 5 In the drawing area. 4 On the group editor toolbar.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. under Floor Plans.

double-click Second Floor.6 Press TAB. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 673 . under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the group editor toolbar. and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. under Floor Plans. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. and filled regions. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. such as door and window tags. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. In the next exercise. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. double-click First Floor. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. such as text. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.

Creating a Detail Group | 675 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click to draw a rectangular region. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

16 In the drawing area. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click (Group). click Modify. and select the text note and the filled region. click Text. 14 On the Edit toolbar. as shown. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and on the Design Bar. 12 Enter Tile.

Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Floor Plans. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. and click Create Instance. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. under Groups. 21 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 677 . Because the detail group contains variables. expand Detail.

i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 678 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.

click (Group). click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 679 . 9 On the Edit toolbar. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser. click Check None.7 On the Options Bar. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. double-click Second Floor. select Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.

Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Place Detail. therefore. Training File 680 | Chapter 18 Grouping . the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. and click OK. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. click Modify. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.

for Create new. and click Create Instance.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 12 On the Design Bar. under Groups\Model. click Desktop. click Modify.rvt. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 5 In the New Project dialog. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Groups. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and expand Model. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and click Save Group. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Open. and click Save. select 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Project is selected.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. In this case. A warning dialog displays. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 3 For File name. verify that Same as group name is selected. Saving and Loading Groups | 681 . 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click OK. accept the default template file. browse to the Desktop. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.

17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 18 In the Project Browser. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 24 In the message dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 682 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Link. click Use Existing. select the linked Revit model. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. When a group is converted to a link.rvt. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Training Files. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and the link is removed. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Remove Link. expand Revit Links. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.rvt file is added as a link to the project.

After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.Site 19 In this tutorial. Using Site Tools In this lesson. You add property lines manually. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. you add a building pad to the site. 683 . you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and then modify the data. convert the data to a table. islands. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.

you create a toposurface using two different methods. 3 On the Design Bar. click Point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. The scale of this view is 1" = 20'.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. click Toposurface. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. expand Floor Plans. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. enter an absolute elevation of 10' 0". 4 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the first method. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Site. expand Views (all). 684 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt This project file was created using the default imperial template. and open Imperial\i_First_Project. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Site.

Creating a Toposurface | 685 . 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. The circle should be approximately 150' wide. Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

12 On the Settings menu. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. under Increment. 10 Repeat the previous step for 30'. and 60' absolute elevations. 9 Add a concentric circle of 20' 0" elevation points inside the 10' 0" contour. click Finish Surface. and click OK. enter an absolute elevation of 20' 0". 11 On the Design Bar. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 50'. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Additional Contours. click Site Settings. enter 5' 0". 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 40'.8 On the Options Bar.

20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 19 On the Design Bar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Before importing the contour data. 15 On the View Control Bar. and press ENTER. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click (Default 3D View). enter 3' 0". and double-click South. click to delete it. click the elevation value. under Views (all). 14 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. Creating a Toposurface | 687 . click to view it at various angles. 18 In the Project Browser. on the Standard toolbar. modify the level names and elevations.

For Layers. Click Open. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. it is considered an import symbol. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . click Yes. select Preserve. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. click Training Files. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 28 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.21 Click the Level 2 text. rename the level Basement. For Colors. under Views (all). Verify that Current view only is not selected. 29 Select the imported topography. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 30 On the Edit menu. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. and press ENTER. select Specify. click Pin Position. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Until it is exploded. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 23 Click the Level 1 text. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view.

click Modify. and then click OK. 36 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear Elevations. select it. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Toposurface | 689 . when the edges highlight. 31 On the Design Bar.This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 34 Under Visibility. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

39 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.When you select the import symbol. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . 42 On the View toolbar. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. and click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. clear C_INDX. 40 On the View toolbar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click Finish Surface.

sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. Adding Property Lines | 691 . you add property lines using two methods. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Adding Property Lines on page 691. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. this project file is required in its current state. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. select Create property lines by sketching. Using the first method. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. and click Save. Click Modify. If you have not completed the previous exercise.44 Navigate to your preferred folder. under Floor Plans. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.rvt. click Property Line. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Lines. double-click Site. name the project Site-in progress. Using the second method. Select and delete the right vertical line.

8 On the Options Bar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. and click OK. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . click Property Line. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 9 In the warning dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. A warning dialog is displayed. add an arc line on the right. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. to delete them. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click OK. when they highlight. select the lines. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. select Edit Table. click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar.

17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.14 In the Property Lines dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. If the gap is not closed. click to place the property lines. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 15 Starting in Row #1. Adding Property Lines | 693 . enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 350' 0" S 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" W 350' 0" N 0°0'0" E 275' 0" N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 16 Click OK. This means there is no gap in the property lines.

the original DWG file remains visible in the view. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Training Files. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line.dwg and click OK. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tags dialog.rfa. 25 Under Visibility. click the Imported Categories tab. you created two sets of property lines. In the final step. 27 On the Options Bar. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. The tags display more prominently in this view. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. Before adding property line segment tags. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines.Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. and click Drafting. click to place it. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Civil\Property Line Tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695. clear Leader. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. this project file is required in its current state. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 30 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. 23 On the View menu. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 20 Click Load.

scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. enter the name Working Contour. In the Object Styles dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Site Settings. for Subcategory. under Contour Line Display. Under Line Pattern. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Dash dot. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 695 . 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click Object Styles. Under Line Color. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. click New. 7 Click OK. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress.In the next exercise. enter 3' 0". Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following values: ■ Under Start. select a shade of Brown. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. specify an interval of 2' 0" passing through elevation 0' 0". and click OK.rvt. 10 Under Additional Contours. select Topography. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 2 On the Settings menu. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.

Under Subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. select Single Value. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The object style subcategory. In the next exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close.■ ■ Under Range Type. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . The next exercise requires a new training file. In this exercise. Working Contour. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 697. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. select Working Contour. 11 Click OK. and islands. parking areas. you create topographic subregions to define roads. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as material. click Lines. and islands. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces.Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. try to replicate the location and proportion. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 2 On the Design Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . and open Imperial\i_Site.rvt. parking areas. click Training Files. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Subregion.

the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. the vertical rectangle is approximately 64' wide. 6 In the Materials dialog. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. and click to open the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. under Identity Data. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click the value for Material. enter Parking for Name. and click OK. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. under Materials and Finishes.Asphalt for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 24' wide. 8 On the Design Bar.TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. select Site . 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

9 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Asphalt. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Topography Schedule.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions, they display within this schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 18' deep to accommodate parking spaces.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 699

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased.

Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. In this training project, additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion, you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Subregion. 22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.

700 | Chapter 19 Site

23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

24 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the value for Material, and click to open the Materials dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog, select Site - Grass for Name, and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, enter Island - Grass for Name, and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 29 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

30 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 701

31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island Grass, and apply the material Site - Grass.

32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar, click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway, and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Place Concrete - walkway.

702 | Chapter 19 Site

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 4".

37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 703

39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder, name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt, and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 41 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 704.

Grading the Toposurface
In this exercise, you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. When you use the grading tool, the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface.

704 | Chapter 19 Site

3 On the Options Bar, click

(Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 767. 6 On the Design Bar, click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog, select Copy Internal Points, and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 8 Select the topographic surface.

Grading the Toposurface | 705

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

10 Press DELETE.

706 | Chapter 19 Site

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished, and new.

11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Grading the Toposurface | 707

13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar, click Point. 15 On the Options Bar, specify an Absolute Elevation of 18' 0". 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

17 On the Design Bar, click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

18 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

708 | Chapter 19 Site

20 On the View toolbar, click to view it at various angles.

(SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu, click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify Existing for Phase, and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Therefore, only the original toposurface displays, because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project, you can delete it. 23 Select the toposurface, and delete it. 24 On the View menu, click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog, under Phasing, specify New Construction for Phase, and click OK. Only the graded topography displays.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 27 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Building Pad on page 709.

Adding a Building Pad
In this exercise, you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element, nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad, it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.

Adding a Building Pad | 709

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Pad. NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 4 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar, sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

710 | Chapter 19 Site

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry, see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 578.

7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View).

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new building pad.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Site Components on page 712.

Adding a Building Pad | 711

Adding Site Components
In this exercise, you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector, select Parking Space: 9' x 18' - 90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.

712 | Chapter 19 Site

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

8 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

Adding Site Components | 713

9 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new parking spaces.

Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

714 | Chapter 19 Site

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

14 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View).

15 On the View toolbar, click (SteeringWheels), and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adding Site Components | 715

Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 716. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Hidden Line. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag Planting Tag: Boxed. Site tutorial-in progress.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Apply. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 716 | Chapter 19 Site . select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag Parking Tag: Boxed. click Tag All Not Tagged. 5 On the View menu. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Apply. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise.rvt. and click OK. double-click Site.

9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 717 . NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. to position the shoulder of the leader. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. as shown: 10 Using the same method.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Click again to the left to position the leader. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. In the following exercise. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. 8 On the Options Bar. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. outside of the site. Click up and to the left.

12 Press and hold CTRL.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 11 On the Design Bar. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 718 | Chapter 19 Site .

16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.■ Clear Leader. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 719. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 719 . Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.

you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 8 Under Fields. 11 On the Window menu. select Type. 4 Under Available fields.rvt. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 In the Site plan. and under Heading. enter Size. 7 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. under Views (all). select Parking for Category. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click Add. The parking schedule is displayed. 6 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. If necessary. Site tutorial-in progress. select Type. select Mark. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click Add. 10 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields. 9 On the Window menu. and under Heading. 720 | Chapter 19 Site . Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Space. under Floor Plans. click Tile. and click OK. select Mark. click Close Hidden Windows. double-click Site.

number the first three spaces consecutively. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan.13 In the Parking Schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 721 .

722 .

use Element Borrowing. such as walls. go to the Worksets dialog. called Worksharing. however. All other team members can view this workset. 723 . and click Editable. Using Worksharing. doors. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. you must first enable Worksharing. After the project is shared. stairs. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. select the desired workset. they cannot make changes to it. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. such as annotations and dimensions. floors. When you are working on a shared project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you specify an active workset. To make a workset editable. In this tutorial. Elements specific to a view. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. and so on. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. The first time you activate worksets within a project.

When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Instead. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. In the next exercise. In a multi-story structure. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. such as a tenant interior. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Team size 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. When setting up Worksharing. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project.

Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Experience has shown that. As new members create worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. and View worksets. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. with each assigned a specific functional task. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 725 . If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. each team member has control over a portion of the design. When creating the new worksets. for a typical project. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Shared Levels and Grids. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Team member roles Typically. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. not including the Project Standards. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. You should have at least one workset for each person. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. In most projects. When you create a new workset. On this tab. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. designers work in teams.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Regardless of the default setting.

This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. When you save to the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. Therefore. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you can select which workset is active. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. however. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. This makes them available to other team members. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. proceeds as usual. the file is saved as the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. However. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Generally. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This is called “Selective Open. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you should then save to your local file. your changes are saved. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. As you work. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. After saving to the central file. you make that workset editable by you. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When finished or at regular intervals. When you save locally (to your local file). For example. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. On the Options Bar. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. if a workset named Interior was created. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. within the local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When you save to the central file.

Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. save to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. and then save the local file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. In this situation. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 727 . you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. using VPN. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. for instance. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. Alternatively. you work no differently then you would in the office. make any required worksets editable. you will not only lose the changes to that workset.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. To do this. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When working remotely. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. if you know who checked out the required workset. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. and make that workset editable. In this instance. In this conceptual exercise. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file.

rvt. and open Common\c_Worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Your username displays as the present owner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Worksets dialog displays. 3 In the Worksets dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.In the next exercise. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. and notice all are editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. click Training Files. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. under Show. click Worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.

and Views. click New. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 8 Click OK. 16 In the drawing area. another is assigned the interior layout. clear Families. 13 In the Rename dialog. For example. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Only User-Created worksets should display. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click OK. In this training file. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. type the name Exterior Shell. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Therefore. expand Floor Plans. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. In this case. ■ 5 Under Show. it is better to make them visible by default. 14 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Project Standards. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Because the interior walls appear in many views. In this simple training project. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 729 . select Workset1.When you enable worksharing. you can rename the default workset. however. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 9 Click New. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. expand Views (all). You do. clear Visible by default in all views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. currently named Workset1. When you initially activate Worksharing. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. imagine four users including yourself. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 12 Click Rename.

24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. including the interior doors. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell.17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Identity Data. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. stairs. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and walls. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 26 On the View menu. 29 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. click the Worksets tab. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 Click OK. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. click . 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.

The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. you enabled Worksharing on a project. click the Worksets tab. In this exercise. 41 In the Worksets dialog. 34 In the drawing area. and click OK. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Now that you have created the central file. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click . select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 43 Click OK. 44 On the File menu. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. double-click Level 2. 35 On the Options Bar. 32 Select Interior Layout. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 42 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 731 . 30 On the View menu. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click Close. click Save As. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. and click OK. under Views (all). click Worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. 38 In the Save As dialog. If any interior elements remain. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 33 In the Project Browser. click Non Editable. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 39 Click Save. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu.

select Interior Layout for Name. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save As. 7 In the Save As dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and double-click Level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. please do so before continuing. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 6 On the File menu. click Options. In this case. 12 Click OK. you create your local file. 2 In the Open dialog. make modifications to the building model. In addition. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click Save. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. and select Specify. check out worksets. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. select Interior Layout. 4 Click Open. Before working on the model. 13 On the Window menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Next. click Open. select the central file. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. expand Views (all). Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 728. and click OK. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session.

19 In the Element Properties dialog. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If this is selected. 22 Click OK. and click OK. click . 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. If it was owned by another user. 24 Click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 20 Under Constraints. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. In this case. however. notice the Editable Only option. Verify that it is cleared. under Identity Data. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. Working Individually with Worksets | 733 . but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 23 On the File menu. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. click Modify. click Worksets. 18 On the Options Bar.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you can still edit this wall. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar. In the Worksets dialog. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click .

34 In the Type Selector. click Wall. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Modify. The precise location is not important. 31 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 26 Delete the door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. 29 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.

You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. If you have not yet completed these exercises. In addition. two users access the central file through a network connection. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 735 . Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. click Save to Central. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. At the end of a work session. leave this file open in its current state. and reload the latest changes. you should perform regular saves. please do so before continuing. a tooltip. For training purposes. By default. each user must check out worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. save to central. Borrowed Elements is selected. add two door openings into the rooms you created. When working in your local file. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Whenever you save.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. which matches the information in the Status Bar. and save locally immediately afterward. you created your local file. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. checked out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In this exercise. You modified the building model. you should relinquish all worksets. it is recommended. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. make elements editable. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. displays the workset as well as the element type. Throughout the process. In this particular case. Saving your work 36 On the File menu.

9 Click Open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. select the central file.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. consider that person to be User 1. 7 In the Open dialog. and select Yes for Editable. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. return to the Settings dialog. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. one user has already created a local file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This file is for your use only. click Options. 3 On the Settings menu. You now have a local copy of the project. and click OK. skip the following section. click Options. select all the User-Created worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 11 On the File menu. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 12 In the Save As dialog. This is a system setting. and click OK. click Save As. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise.rvt. click Worksets. For training purposes. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click Save. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. instructions are staggered. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and proceed to Creating a local copy. In the following section of this exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . enter User 2. under Username. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 15 On the File menu. specifically sequenced. and click OK. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 4 Click the General Tab and. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and select Specify. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Open. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. User 2: Create a local file.

” 29 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and select Yes for Editable. 17 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. open it now. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 19 On the File menu. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout.You are now the owner of that workset. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. click Save to Central. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. modify the building model. select the lower exterior wall. and double-click Level 1. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 737 . 28 In the Save to Central dialog. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and double-click Level 1. click Worksets. 27 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. If it is not open. expand Views (all). If you only have one workset checked out. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. expand Views (all). it becomes the active workset. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.

select Yes for Editable. under Views (all). double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 738 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click OK. you should create a furniture plan view. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1. click Worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. click Save to Central. Before adding any furniture. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 41 On the File menu. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 46 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans.” 35 Click OK. 43 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. click Reload Latest. 33 On the File menu. Click Yes. 42 Select Furniture Layout. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide.” 39 Click OK. right-click Level 1. 37 On the File menu. When you save to central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 44 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. However. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent.

such as Wall Types. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Component. 65 Click OK. click Save to Central. click Edit/New. enter Exterior Wall . 53 On the File menu. 60 In the Rename dialog. are placed under Project Standards. 61 Click OK 2 times. click the Worksets tab.” 55 Click OK. under Show. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Modify. click Worksets. and click inside any room. Therefore. 62 On the File menu. 49 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Visibility/Graphics.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. rather than Families. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. choose any desk. the Visible by default option was not selected. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. NOTE System families. 66 On the File menu. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. and click Element Properties. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 50 On the View menu. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK.200mm. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 739 . select Project Standards. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. and click OK. click Rename. 63 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 48 In the Type Selector.

you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 3 In the Save As dialog. 70 On the File menu. There are specific instructions for each user. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and these problems are rectified. In the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). finished the previous workset exercises. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. As each of you work. click Save As. and still have your local files open. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.rvt. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). throughout this training. This exercise requires two users and. modified the building model. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you save the training file as a central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. select the following. At the appropriate point in this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and published their changes back to the central file. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In subsequent steps. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. 740 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . User 1: Reload latest. Each user checked out worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click OK. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. and save 69 On the File menu. you need to set up your central and local files. select Save to Central. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 740. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. leave this file open in its current state. click Options. Each user must have network access to the central file. select Reload Latest. Checking out worksets. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise.

click Save As. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Save As. 8 In the Save As dialog. 6 On the File menu. and select Specify. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 741 . This is a system setting. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 5 Click Save. On the Settings menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 18 In the Save As dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 On the File menu. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Options. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. The central file should still be open. and click OK. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. In addition. select Make this a Central File after save. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 17 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. and click Save.4 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. This is the local file for User 1. Set the Username to User 2. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and click Save. 15 Click Open. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Options. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. click Open. select the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. return to the Settings dialog.

User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 742 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click the File menu. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 24 Under Active Workset. double-click Level 1. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. At this point. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 27 Under Active Workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and click Editing Requests. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select the second window from the top. select Exterior Shell. 29 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Worksets dialog. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 30 On the left exterior wall. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select them. and select Yes for Editable. select Interior Layout. under Floor Plans.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. After you submit the request. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and then click OK. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and click Open. and then click OK. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. select the Interior Layout workset. You are now the owner of that workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. click Worksets. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. Afterwards. if any User-Created worksets are not open. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select the following. and notice the window is in the new location. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. you requested permission to edit the element. and close 39 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 35 Click Grant. to Local. click Close. and the other user granted it. 36 Click Close. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 38 Click OK. In this multi-user exercise. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. select the request submitted by User 2. click Check Now. select Save to Central. In this case.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 743 .

744 .

Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. For example. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. and each option set can have multiple schemes. At any time in the design process. 745 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In this tutorial. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can have multiple sets of design options. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Using design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).

you can edit it. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. In the final exercise of this lesson. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. you design each of the structural options. the roof and structure systems must work together. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. make your final design decision. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the second exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. After you create a design option. With the second option. and delete the unwanted options from the project. each is constructed for interchangeability. In the first exercise in this lesson.rvt. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. The client has asked you to create various options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. therefore. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. under Option Set. click Training Files. each with multiple design options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. click New. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. 2 In the Design Options dialog. TIP In this exercise. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you set up multiple design option sets. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set.In this particular case. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. the only available command is to create a new option set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 7 In the Type Selector. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. In this case. select: ■ ■ ■ . select Round Column: 03" Diameter. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. expand Views (all). you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 9 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. expand Floor Plans.3 Select Option 1 (primary). and click Close. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click Edit Selected. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. or add a dimension string between the columns. add three columns. By selecting Multiple. click Column. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. TIP To center the middle column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and the third column centered between the two. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. In the following illustration. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Modify. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click 12 On the Options Bar. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 5 On the View menu.

15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. Because of the size of the columns. click . A copy of the three selected columns is added. 18 On the View toolbar. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished.

Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Use the following illustration as a guide. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Modify. The first click specifies the beam start point. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Next. under Floor Plans. Zoom in on the upper right column. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. select Round Bar : 2". 19 In the Project Browser. In it.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 21 In the Type Selector. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. click Beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 23 On the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF CORE. and click at its center to set the beam start point.

30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. move down to the next set of columns. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy.25 On the Edit toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. click . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the center point. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.

46 Under Option. under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. click New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. not a new option set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. click Rename. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. select Option 1 (primary). enter Roofing for New. and click OK. under Option. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click New. name the option Louvers. click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. 43 In the Rename dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 45 Under Roofing. enter Brackets for New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click Rename. and click OK. Creating the Structural Design Options | 751 . and click OK. and click OK. under Option Set. 37 Select Option 2 and. under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set.

48 Under Option. under Structure. 52 Click Close. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. double-click ROOF TERRACE. and click OK. click Rename. select Beam. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 53 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. it will resemble the following illustration. Under Now Editing.47 Under Roofing. 51 Under Edit. This allows you to more easily manage the project. When finished. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Option 2. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. select Edit Selected. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise.

57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Type Selector. select Roof Beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 753 . Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. click Component. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu.

click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Click to indicate the end point of the move.60 After aligning the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .

68 In the Design Options dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. i_Urban_House-in progress. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.rvt. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. name the file. you need this file in its current state. 67 On the Tools menu. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 755 . and click Save. click Finish Editing. click . click Save As. 69 Click Close.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 70 On the File menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 66 On the View toolbar. which is visible by default.

With the second option. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. you design each of the roofing options. click Component. click Edit Selected. expand Floor Plans. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and double-click TOP OF CORE. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Under Now Editing. In the next exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Roofing. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you set up multiple design option sets. delete them after the rafter is in place. 5 Click Close. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 4 Under Edit. Sunscreen. If you need to add dimensions.rvt. The first option. The second roofing system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. The dimensions shown are for training purposes.In this exercise. the other for beams. select Louvers (primary). expand Views (all). 2 On the Tools menu. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. select Rafter 2 x 10. each with multiple design options to pick from. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. a Louver system. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. open it now. do so now. 6 In the Project Browser.

13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 757 . Enter 5 for Number. 15 On the Edit menu. and click OK. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 16 On the Options Bar. click . Select Constrain. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Array. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. under Other.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 38' 6" for Length. Select 2nd for Move To. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 3' 3". The space separates feet and inches. TIP When entering a dimension value. For example. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. you can enter 3 3. rather than entering 3' 3". 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you do not need to type the foot and inch markers.

click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 26 On the Options Bar. click Component. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 759 . select Louver 2 x 6. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and click Array. 27 For the array starting point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 20 In the Type Selector. under Other. and press Enter. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. Enter 34 for Number. and. 25 With the louver still selected. when the listening dimension displays. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . enter 1’. Select Constrain. click the Edit menu. and select the louver you just placed. click Modify.

The louver roof system is complete. click . click Finish Editing. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Edit. 30 On the Tools menu. 29 On the View toolbar. 31 In the Design Options dialog.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 761 . the top of the next column on the right. 41 Select the top of the left column. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 34 In the Project Browser. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Lines. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 39 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. then you can modify it through the dimension. 40 On the Options Bar. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Sunscreen. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. and click OK. expand Elevations. and the third point defines the arc. 33 Under Editing. 43 On the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Therefore.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. and double-click West. click Edit Selected. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . In this case. You will fix this in a later step. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. Click OK. click Properties. under Roofing. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. and then click Close.

48 On the Design Bar. Select the right arc. The second roofing system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. you need this file in its current state. click . You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 45 Click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Editing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. and then click Close. click Trim/Extend. then the center arc. The first option. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The arcs should connect. The louver roof system is complete. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. In this exercise. click Save. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. under Edit. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 50 On the Tools menu. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you designed each of the roofing options. 49 On the View toolbar. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. Under Constraints. 46 On the Tools menu. 52 On the File menu. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. Sunscreen. a Louver system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Under Constraints.44 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. 762 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Visibility/Graphics. 2 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 On the View menu. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. enter Primary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under 3D Views. tertiary. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. After exploring the combinations. click the Design Options tab. you select a design. and click OK. and click Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Click OK. double-click Primary Option. 11 On the View menu. 5 Right-click each of the copies. 4 In the Project Browser. secondary. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. and last options. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. double-click Secondary Option. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. and delete the discarded design options. click the Design Options tab. and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. expand 3D Views. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. do so now.Managing Design Options In this exercise. make it part of the building model. under Views (all). All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. right-click {3D}. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under Views (all). and click Rename. under Views (all). 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Managing Design Options | 763 . If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial.

14 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. and click OK. 19 On the View menu. and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 15 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK. 764 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views. double-click Tertiary Option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views.

select Beam. click Close. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the current primaries are no longer options. 29 Select Roofing. double-click Primary Option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Structure. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 24 Under Option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Yes. An alert is displayed. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click Delete to remove the views that used options. In this case. 22 On the Tools menu. 30 Under Option Set. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 26 Under Option Set. click Delete. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. This was the client choice for structural. Managing Design Options | 765 . In your design options. the beam option becomes part of the model. 31 In the alert dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Accept Primary. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 27 In the alert dialog. Because the client has selected the design option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.At this point. The set is deleted. select Make Primary. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 25 Select Structure. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Yes. since you no longer need them.

In this exercise. After exploring the combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. you selected a design. 766 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 35 On the File menu. click Save.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. made it part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. 767 . you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing walls and doors. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. This changes room definition and total building model area.Project Phasing 22 In any project. demolish existing construction. In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. then add new walls and doors in a different location. complete with schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You create new phases. In the second exercise. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. For the client. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules.

are visible in this view. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all).rvt. expand Floor Plans. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click Modify. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . define the units. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. click (Element Properties). you do not need to change the project units to metric. 4 Click Cancel. 6 On the Options Bar. go to the Settings menu. click Project Units. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 7 Click Cancel. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. click Training Files. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. under Phasing. This means that all building model elements.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. regardless of phase. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. When you create a new project. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. As you add new elements to the building model. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. During the demolition and renovation process. under Phasing. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. If you wish to do so. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. and click OK. and open Common\c_Phasing. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Rename dialog. TIP If this were a multi-story building. and click OK. Because this is a renovation project. including the door tags. 11 In the Filter dialog. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views.Existing. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. all of the building model elements.Existing. enter Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.Demo. and click Rename. click . 17 Click No.Existing. Phasing Your Model | 769 . Because this is a phase-specific view. right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click Rename. 16 In the Rename dialog. enter Level 1 . under Floor Plans. are highlighted in red. After you release the mouse button. under Floor Plans. After you create the views. and click OK. right-click Level 1. for Phase Created. 14 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). click Modify. clear Door Tags. under Phasing. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. and click OK. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. select Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views.

770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click the Phase Filters tab. you modify these settings.Existing. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. under Floor Plans. for Phase. and Temporary. Existing. under Phasing. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Phase status is time-dependent. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. There are five default phase filters. 27 Click New. under New. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Demo. Later in this exercise. Demolished. 21 In the Project Browser. select Overridden. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. select Existing. double-click Level 1 . you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 26 In the Phasing dialog. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. On a logical time line. however. In this case. 29 For Composite Plan. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. under Floor Plans. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. You may need to zoom in to see this. Because of this time relationship. new construction occurs after existing construction.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Next. enter Composite Plan. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. to which all the building model elements belong. 28 Under Filter Name. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style.

The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. click the value for Color. 36 Using the same method. double-click Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 42 In the Project Browser. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. its display changes to a red dashed line. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Phasing Your Model | 771 . 39 In the Phasing dialog. As you click each wall. 34 In the Color dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 32 In the Demolished row. under Floor Plans. Next. select a lighter blue. select the line style. When you demolish the host. or you can use the demolish tool. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. under Cut ➤ Lines. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. select the interior walls one at a time. select Demolished. you begin demolition. 35 Click OK twice.Existing. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. select red.Demo. you demolish all elements hosted by it. click (Demolish). 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. click OK.31 Under Phase Status.

and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. and click OK. 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Type Selector. click Wall. for Phase Filter. 772 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . add a long horizontal wall. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. under Phasing. under Phasing. select Basic Wall: Interior . 49 On the Design Bar. click Door. 50 In the Type Selector.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr).Demo. select Show Previous + New. The demolished walls no longer display. and click OK.Existing. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Open Level 1 .44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.New. 59 Open Level 1 . 62 If necessary.New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 60 On the View toolbar. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. regardless of phase. All elements are displayed in this view. Phasing Your Model | 773 . new is shown in blue. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. click (Default 3D View).Demo. which are displayed as red. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All. 61 On the View Control Bar. 57 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 . and existing shows as half-tone. The renovated building model plan is displayed.

expand Views (all). Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. go to the Settings menu. All room boundaries are phase-specific. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. In this view. you do not need to change the project units to metric. You can also see that the room quantities. you can see the new walls added to the building model.Existing.New. In the next exercise. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. define the units. click Project Units. 3 Open Level 1 . They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. therefore.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. sizes. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and new construction.Demo. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. demolition. you can do so at this time. the rooms change in both definition and size. If you wish to save this file. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to do so. expand Floor Plans. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. 774 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and double-click Level 1 . and click OK. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As the renovation process continues. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. Notice that this view is the original building model. In this view. 2 Open Level 1 . you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases.rvt. 63 Close the file.

6 Open Level 1 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click in each room as you move to the right.Demo.New. 10 Open Level 1 . 5 Click OK. and maximize the view. Use the following illustration as a guide. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Room. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. yet they have different room numbers. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.Existing. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Modify. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. In the Phasing dialog. 13 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 775 . click Room.

room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. The two schedule views tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. expand Schedules/Quantities. 19 On the Window menu. click Tile. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. View phase-specific room schedules. and double-click Room Schedule . 18 Open Room Schedule . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 20 Close the file. In addition.Existing. 17 On the Window menu. click Close Hidden Windows.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. In this exercise. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 16 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In this case. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.New Construction.

In this tutorial. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. performance. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. and manage the links throughout the project. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. 777 . In the final lesson. You position the building models on the site plan. In these situations. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. This maximizes efficiency. Comparison of alternatives on a site.

Linking Building Models In this lesson. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . One building model is a condominium. and the other is a townhouse. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. modify their visibility. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site. You link two building models to the project.

rvt. c_Townhouse. in the Model Linking folder that you created. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 5 On the File menu. c_Condo_Complex. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Manual . and open Common\c_Site. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . select the three files. All three files now reside. This option is grayed out. ■ ■ Manual . click Close. 8 Clear Read-only. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and click OK. Otherwise. RELATED See the lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Open. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 795. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. click Save As. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.■ Auto .Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. this option will place the link at a predefined location. and save the file there. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. 2 On the File menu.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. click Open. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. right-click. 4 On the File menu. you can do so. however. this system is not exposed to the user. click Training Files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. Auto . with write permission. Select c_Site.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and click Properties.

Notice the blue detail lines. select Auto . These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 10 In the Project Browser.Origin to Origin. For Positioning.■ Click Open. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 13 Click Open. expand Views (all). 11 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1.

The Move command requires two clicks. 16 For the move start point.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The linked model moves as one object. click (Move). 17 For the move endpoint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 781 . similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. After you specify the location to move to. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The first click specifies the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Standard move commands work with linked building models.rvt displays in the Type Selector.

18 On the View menu.Origin to Origin. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . For Positioning. 21 Click Open. and select c_Townhouse. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

click (Rotate). the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. In this case. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 783 .23 On the Edit toolbar.

click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

The Copy command works much like the Move command. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 785 . and the second click specifies the copy-to point. click (Copy). Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

34 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. under Identity data. 37 On the View toolbar. enter Townhouse A. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. and click OK. click Rotate. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 32 On the Edit menu. click . click (Default 3D View).A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. for Name.

click and hold Orbit. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. If you have not completed the previous exercise.38 On the File menu. In the next exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. they were placed too low within the site topography. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 787 . NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. When you originally linked the files. After linking the files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click Save. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model.

4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In the steps that follow. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.rvt. under Views (all). When using the Align command. To do this. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. when it highlights.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and click to select the line. 3 In the Project Browser. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. and click OK. click (Align). the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click to select it. and double-click South. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. Click the Revit Links tab. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and then select the plane that you want to align. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. you first select the plane you want to align to. 7 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. In this case. expand Elevations.

Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 12 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 789 . click (Default 3D View). align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. under Elevations. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click and hold Orbit. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 15 On the File menu. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. double-click North. click 13 On the View toolbar. click Save. (SteeringWheels). 11 Return to the South elevation view. This would over-constrain the model. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 9 In the Project Browser.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. 9 Under Visibility. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you link a file. 4 Under Visibility. and the halftone settings for each linked project. select <Custom>. detail level. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.rvt. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. expand c_Townhouse. scroll down and clear Levels. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. As you can see. If you have not completed the previous exercise. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project.rvt. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. click the Revit Links tab. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. click OK. under Elevations. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. click Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise. display settings. or Custom. 8 For Annotation Categories. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. do so before continuing. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. In the next exercise. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. click Custom. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. 2 On the View menu. you can independently control the visibility settings. By linked view. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 10 Click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. double-click South. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you need this project file open and in this view. click By Host View.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness.rvt. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 24 Click OK. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. on the Basics tab. medium. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. click By Host View. By default. By selecting custom under Model Categories. no detail level changes are required. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. In this case.rvt. click the Revit Links tab. click Visibility/Graphics. select <Custom>. Using the Custom option.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 23 In the Model categories list. select Custom. click the Revit Links tab. under Floor Plans. or fine. 14 On the View menu. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. With linked files. 20 For c_Townhouse. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. under Display Settings. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. and then set the detail level to coarse. expand c_Townhouse. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 16 Under Visibility. double-click Level 1.rvt. and click OK. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 791 . You can click the value for Detail Level. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser.

28 Select By linked view for View range. under Visibility. By default. 26 Under Display Settings. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. In most cases. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. In this case. 31 On the File menu. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. existing. click Custom for the Townhouse link. you manage the linked files. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. on a sloped site for instance. all new. click Save. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. 25 On the Revit Links tab. you need this project file open and in this view. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. phase. this is preferable. 29 Click OK. With the Show All filter applied.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise.rvt. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. demolished. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. All other components are grayed out. In this exercise. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. In this case. However. there are situations. click OK. select c_Townhouse. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. In the next exercise. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. and phase filter of a specific link.

the link is maintained. In a shared coordinate environment. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. 6 At the confirmation prompt. In general. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. Locations Not Saved. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Managing Linked Building Models | 793 . click the Revit tab. select c_Condo_Complex. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. and Saved Path fields are read only.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 7 Click OK. click Manage Links. 4 Under Linked File. 5 Click Unload. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 3 Under Path Type. Notice the Loaded. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. do so before continuing. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. They supply information regarding the links.rvt. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. The default path type is Relative. click Yes.

A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. In general. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. and click Reload. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. In these cases. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. and select Specify. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. click Save As. right-click c_Condo_Complex. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. When you initially place the link. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. click the arrow next to the Open button. To do this. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. If you choose not to open that workset. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. expand Revit Links. However. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. the link is not loaded.

you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 778. When you share coordinates between projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. If you have not completed the previous lesson. In the next lesson. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. and save it as an RVT file. The host file consists primarily of site components. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. leave the project file open in its current view. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. In this exercise. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside.10 In the Save As dialog. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. name the file Site_Project. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. do so before continuing. you are establishing a shared origin point. In essence. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. When used in conjunction with model linking. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. and the resulting project files. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 795 .

click the Condo Complex.coordinates are used. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case. As indicated in the Status Bar. 3 In the drawing area. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Select Site_Project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. When you are working in the host project. open it before continuing. click Open. do so before continuing. 2 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the lesson. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. and the resulting project files. If you have closed the project. Linking Building Models on page 778. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file.rvt and click Open.

it is placed at a specific location. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. 5 On the Design Bar. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. even though both models originate from one linked file. select Location 1. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 797 . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. this location is not saved outside of the host project. In this exercise. and Lot C. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. but can have multiple additional locations. However. Lot B. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. These three locations can be named Lot A. If you have not completed the exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. On the Status Bar. and click OK. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. do so before continuing.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click to select it. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. when the edges highlight. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. you specify and save the two townhouse locations.

Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. . select Move instance to. click OK. 7 In the Rename dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. under Instance Parameters. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Reconcile. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. This is a one-time operation. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 12 On the Options Bar. click Rename. click Change. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 4 Under Value. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. In the Choose Location dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. Record the current position as a location. enter Lot A for New. When constraining a link to a location.2 On the Options Bar. After a link instance is assigned a shared location.

This is a two-click process. and click OK. 26 Click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click the Revit tab.Notice the OK button is not active. To explicitly save a location. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. or cancel the action. you cannot redefine its location. and click OK. The first click specifies the move start point. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. Save locations 21 On the File menu. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. and then select the townhouse project. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 799 . click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. a warning displays. 23 Click Save Locations. 30 On the Tools menu. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. make sure Lot B is selected. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. When you release the mouse button. 19 In the Select Location dialog. When you relocate a project. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click OK. By relocating a project. click Duplicate. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. select the second option. Notice the OK button is still not active. the active location position is moved. enter Lot B for Name. click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. The second click specifies the move endpoint. ignore the warning. and click OK. Record current position as. When you create a location. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. click Manage Links. select Save. and the left townhouse resides at that location.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. In this exercise. 800 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. select Save. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 36 On the File menu. click Close. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. 33 On the Edit menu. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. NOTE In the following exercise.

For Positioning. Select c_Condo_Complex. double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Working with a Linked Building Model | 801 . the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.rvt file. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. The current active location is Lot A. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. When opening the linked file. select Auto . do so before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. under Floor Plans. 2 On the File menu. Also. if other models were linked into the same host. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. In addition. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.rvt file. Click Open. it is placed automatically within the host project. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.By Shared Coordinates. If you have not completed the exercises. Because this building model only has one named location.

and click OK. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. click Manage Place and Locations. 802 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. do so before continuing. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Duplicate. under Graphics. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. orient a view to true north. you can select Lot C if necessary. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. 7 Click OK. In this exercise. In this exercise. and click OK. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. you create a new location. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 3 In the Name dialog. you need this project file open and in this view. and click Make Current. select True North for Orientation. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. enter Lot C. In the next exercise. In the host file. you manage the shared locations. click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. click View Properties. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson.

10 On the File menu. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Select Site_Project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 803 . If you have not completed the exercise. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. On the Options Bar. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. click Open.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. click Close. You can save the file if you wish.rvt and click Open. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. In this exercise. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.

Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Doors. and click OK. select Count. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 804 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Fields tab. under Category.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.8 Click OK. 14 On the File menu. select Family and Type for Sort by. under Other. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise. click Close. right-click Door Schedule. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 13 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 805 . and then click OK twice. clear Itemize every instance. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. click Save. 12 Select Grand totals.

806 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 807 .

808 .

In the first lesson. click Training Files. 6 In the New Project dialog. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. under Template file. selection default options. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. you modify the system environment. select Invert background color. 809 . 3 In the Options dialog. Finally. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. In the second lesson. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 4 Under Colors. which is independent of the project settings. click Browse. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial.rte. they are not saved to project files or template files. These settings control the graphics. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. and your username when using worksets. 8 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. you create an office template. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. journal cleanup options. click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and set it as your default template. click the Graphics tab. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. notification preferences.

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Under Notifications. 22 When prompted to save changes. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click the Graphics tab. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Settings. the elements causing the error display using this color. 11 Under Colors. click Modify. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click No. and select the wall. For Selection color. click Wall. click the value for Selection color. 15 Click OK. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. When an error occurs. 18 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Color dialog. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .rvt. click Training Files. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. However. 26 In the Options dialog. select yellow. select None. select One hour. select red. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click the Graphics tab. 13 Click the General tab. clear Invert background color. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.10 In the Options dialog. For Tooltip assistance.

Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 5 Under Default path for user files. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. Under Username. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Specifying File Locations on page 811. select the folder to save your files to by default. under Default path for family template files. select your preferred Save reminder interval. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 811 . Your login name displays by default. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. These files are used in the software support process. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Browse. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. However. do not save the changes. notice the list of library names. If prompted. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 7 In the Options dialog. click Places. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. including your default project template. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. centralized. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. click the File Locations tab. TIP To view a template. Under Journal File Cleanup. you specify default file locations. and click Open. For Tooltip assistance. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Default template file. click Browse. and click Browse to select a template. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. select Normal. This path is set automatically during the installation process.27 Click the General tab. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. such as in a large. 8 Click Cancel. family template files. 10 In the Places dialog. you can start a new project with that template. and family libraries. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.

templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click the icon side of the field. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . saving. under Libraries. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and click Open. When you are opening. and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries. 11 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. In the following illustration. click (Add Value). notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Load. or loading a Revit Architecture file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Save.library names and path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. and select it as the library path.

you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you work in a large office. click Edit. scroll down the list of building industry terms. If you want to relocate this path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. view the current path. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. and Import dialogs. custom color files. 28 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 9 In the text editor. 23 Select My Library. Load. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 24 Click 25 Click OK. such as bump maps. 22 Click Places. 21 Click the File Locations tab. and click OK twice. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options | 813 . 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Spelling tab. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 15 Under Library Name. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Save. click the My Library icon. This path is determined during installation. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specifying Spelling Options on page 813. and decal image files. 2 In the Options dialog. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 5 In the text editor. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 Under Settings. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click My Library. 19 Click Cancel.

click the Spelling tab. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Restore Defaults. click Browse. click Text. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. work with snapping turned off. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 14 Click in the drawing area. 18 In the Options dialog.rte. you modify snap settings. click OK. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.11 In the Options dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modifying Snap Settings on page 814. click OK. you modify snap increments. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click default template. under Template file. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Edit. 22 In the text editor. click Modify. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If prompted. 12 On the Standard toolbar. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. In this exercise. do not save the changes. 19 Under Settings. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 23 In the Options dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. delete sheetmtl-CU. 21 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. 20 Under Personal dictionary.

click Wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and enter 1 . TIP To zoom while sketching. enter SM. 8 In the Snaps dialog. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. While sketching. 7 Under Object Snaps. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. For example. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom out until it does so. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 815 . If it does not. use the wheel button on your mouse. 10 On the Options Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. such as ZO to zoom out. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.6 Under Dimension Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. clear Chain. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click OK. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ .

This is the increment that you added previously. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and click Wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that snapping is once again active. and the wall edges. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Enter SM. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Move the cursor downward. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. 24 Click OK. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. If you move the cursor along the wall. and delete the value 1’ . Modifying Project Settings on page 817. and move the cursor to the right. it will snap to the endpoints. and do not save the file.. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Under Dimension Snaps.

fill patterns. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. save the project file with a unique name.rvt. annotations. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You create and modify materials. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using these options. and object styles. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you render a region to observe the changes. Modifying Project Settings | 817 . When you apply a material to an element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. click Training Files. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. lines.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Finally. In the steps that follow. and open Imperial\i_Settings. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings.

9 Click Apply. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. and click OK.Fieldstone. These details will display in rendered images. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. for Class. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. and select Masonry . and click OK. When a model element is loaded into a project. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. 3 Click (Duplicate). Masonry . Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. The Render Appearance Library is a local. scale. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click 02 Entry Level.Fieldstone. and texture of the material. select Stone. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 6 Click Replace. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. When you change properties of a render appearance. However. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. read-only library for render appearances. In the steps that follow.Stone. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. In the next exercise. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. In the Materials dialog. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 11 Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click (Element Properties).Fieldstone material.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. enter Masonry . The properties describe the color. 2 Scroll down the materials list.

21 Click OK three times. 20 In the Materials dialog. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.14 In the Element Properties dialog. Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 24 In the Type Selector. 26 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). select the rear exterior wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK.Fieldstone. click Edit/New. click This is the material that you created. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 25 On the View toolbar. click in the Material field. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 15 Click Duplicate. 16 Enter the new wall name.Brick. 23 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select Masonry . . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click Model Graphics Style. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 17 For Structure. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 18 For Finish 1. Creating and Applying Materials | 819 . click Edit.

select Low or Medium. click Render. under Quality. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 29 In the 3D view. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 31 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select the render region (a red rectangle). click Rendering Dialog. right-click the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. The rendering process begins. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. When finished. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. and click Rendering. for Setting. In the following exercise. select Region. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and there is no stone pattern applied in this view.

you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. expand Elevations. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. i_Settings-in progress. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Drafting pattern density is fixed. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. and clear Region.rvt. and double-click West. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 821 . 34 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form.rvt. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. such as steel. Zoom into the model. in the Rendering dialog. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. click Show the model. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 821. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 33 In the Rendering dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Then click Render again.

822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog.Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 9 Under Custom. 13 On the Options Bar. 3 Under Pattern Type. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. enter . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 5 Click New. click Import. select fldstn. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 11 Click OK.Fieldstone. click 15 For Structure. and for Import scale. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 10 For Name. enter Fieldstone. (Element Properties). click in the Material field. for Finish 1. click Edit. click .56. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. click Training Files. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. choose Model. select Custom.pat. click Edit/New. 7 Under Custom. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. and click OK.

21 In the Materials dialog. you can set the window frame material to By Category. click OK. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles | 823 . click Modify. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click 3 Windows.In the Materials dialog. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Type. select Model. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. click to select a fill pattern. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles on page 823. 22 Click OK three times. 18 Under Surface Pattern.rvt. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. expand 3D Views. For example. TIP If the pattern does not display. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. i_Settings-in progress.Fieldstone material. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

and click 15 Click OK twice. and click . under Materials and Finishes.2 On the keyboard. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. for Trim Exterior Material. click Edit/New. 16 On the Design Bar. for Trim Exterior Material. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 9 Click OK twice. 5 On the Options Bar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 In the Materials dialog. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category. click in the Value column. 11 On the Options Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. under Materials and Finishes. 14 In the Materials dialog. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). click (Element Properties). 10 Select the arched window. . 4 Select one of the rectangular windows.

The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. select Trim. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 23 Click Replace. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. click in the Material column. and click 20 In the Materials dialog.Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. and select Trim. 25 In the search field. and click OK. type red. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.red paint. 19 For Trim. . Controlling Object Styles | 825 . expand Windows. for Class. (Duplicate). for Name. select Paint. Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. enter Trim . 18 On the Model Objects tab. descriptions. or keywords include the word red.

rvt. enter Roof Line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. for Name. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.rvt. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 826. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and click OK. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 31 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D view). select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . is open with the 3D view active. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Settings-in progress. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. click OK. i_Settings-in progress. 28 Under Shading. When you render a 3D view. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click New. 29 In the Materials dialog. click OK. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 827 .6 Click OK twice. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Click OK. select Roof Line. select Red. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. under Category. Now that you have created a line pattern. 11 For Line Pattern. 7 On the View Control Bar. select Roofs. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 10 For Line Color.

and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. Notice that the line color displays in this view. Plans. but not the line pattern. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. under Floor Plans. elevations. 15 In the Project Browser. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . double-click 03 Roof. 14 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. sections.13 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. double-click to Building.

select Black. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 18 For Line Color. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. Click (Draw). 19 For Line Pattern. click New. under Modify Subcategories. under Floor Plans.16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Line Pattern. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. For Line Color. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 31 Click OK. select Roofs. 25 Click OK twice. click Override. select Solid. select Double Dash 5/8" . for Visibility. This places the line above the topography. select Roof Line. double-click Site. select 2. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. For Color. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. under Category. select Blue. click Lines. select Level: 02 Entry Level. select Roofs. For Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Red. 33 In the Type Selector. select 5. 29 For Name. specify the following: ■ For Plane. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 20 Click OK. enter Zoning Setback. and click OK. ■ Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 829 . 34 On the Options Bar. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Zoning Setback. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog.

Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If Site is not selected. select it. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 39 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. under Floor Plans. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. expand Lines. 44 On the View toolbar. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .■ Click (Line). double-click 02 Entry Level. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Default 3D View). as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. (Default 3D View). Expand Site. and clear Property Lines. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations on page 831. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 36 On the View toolbar. and clear Zoning Setback. and then clear Property Lines. 43 Click OK. 40 In the Project Browser. and clear Zoning Setback. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines.

For Unit suffix. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 7 Click OK twice. You have created a new dimension style.Metric and click OK.rvt.rvt. for Units Format.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click the default value. click Duplicate. click Dimension. 5 Under Text. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Units. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. Modifying Annotations | 831 . click Modify. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click one wall. select Linear . select mm. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. (Undo). and then click outside the second wall. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. i_Settings-in progress. click another wall. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 4 Enter the name Linear . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select Millimeters. i_Settings-in progress. double-click 02 Entry Level. 9 In the Type Selector. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 10 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. To place a dimension.Metric.

In the preview image.Number is now the assigned tag. click Window Tag . scroll down to Windows. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag . clear Leader. notice Window Tags appears twice.Number as the assigned tag. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Tags dialog. 27 On the west wall. click the bottom window. click Tag All Not Tagged. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value.Number. In the steps that follow. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number.Number. Window Tag . 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number. Then press Delete. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. under Category. Under Category. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 21 In the Tags dialog. verify that Create is clear. click Tag ➤ By Category. 23 Click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. select the 3 window tags. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). notice that the label displays 1i. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files.rfa. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. scroll to Windows and notice that Window Tag . 19 Click Load. the other displays the instance value. 16 Click Cancel. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. and click OK. 30 Under Leader. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. Leave Window Tag . 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Unless overridden. click the default value. and click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. for Length. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 2 In the Project Units dialog. i_Settings-in progress. you specify the project units of measurements. (Default 3D View). for Area. select Openings. 8 Under Walls. select Faces. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Format dialog. 32 On the View toolbar.Temporary Dimensions. In this project. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 31 On the Design Bar. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and Detail Level Options | 833 . 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. For Unit symbol. Specifying Units of Measurement. select SF. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. you modify the detail level assignments. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Specifying Units of Measurement. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. click the default value. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Temporary Dimensions. dimensions use these project settings. click Modify. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 6 Click OK. and click OK. dimension values display using this setting. you modify the temporary dimension settings. In the second section. In the final section. for Rounding.Temporary Dimensions.rvt. select To the nearest 1/16". and Detail Level Options on page 833. Click OK. Unless overridden. In the first section. select 0 decimal places. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.

Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In this table. expand Views (all). you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. click Training Files. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. You do not select a view scale to move it. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. In this exercise. and expand 3D Views. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 12 Click OK. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Notice the 1/4" = 1’ 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser.When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. expand Floor Plans. click . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.

and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click OK. notice that views are grouped by phase.2 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. expand each sheet set.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 10 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 5 On the Views tab. 8 Select Phase. expand each view type. 14 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . select Discipline. In the Project Browser. under Sheets. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 835 . Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. select Type/Discipline. expand Sheets (all). 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. and click OK. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 13 Select Sheet Prefix.

Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 16 Click the Views tab. navigate to your preferred directory. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. under Views. enter a unique file name. and Discipline. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. In the lesson that follows. click the Folders tab. In this lesson. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. expand 3D Views. Proceed to the next lesson. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. If you want to save this file. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. and click New. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click OK. Creating an Office Template on page 837. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. View Type (Family and Type). and click OK. you create an office template. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. expand Complete. and expand both Architectural and Structural. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. click Browse. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. 7 In the Project Browser. you select the starting point for your office template. 4 Select the Construction-Default. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. and open Imperial\Templates. click Training Files. select Project. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. levels. and click Open. If you have additional projects open. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. When you create new projects. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In that case. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can choose from several templates. click Browse. When you create a new template based on an existing template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 2 Under Template file. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. and double-click North. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. when you create a new project. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 12 Under Template File. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Creating an Office Template | 837 . For example. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. 6 Click OK. close them. and view names. in the drawing area. for Create new. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. the same rules apply. 5 In the New Project dialog.Creating an Office Template In this lesson.rte template. 9 In the Project Browser. dimensions styles. Whenever you create a new project or template.

see the previous lesson. When you create or modify a material. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. In this exercise. you modify the project settings for your new template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. or refer to the online help. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. specific modifications are not dictated. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. transparency. including color. weights. Observe the materials that are already defined. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. select Project template. If you want to use a template other than the default. and similar attributes. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 14 Click Open. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 Under Create new. You do this by defining the render appearance. For example. When you create the material. and click OK. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. see Modifying Project Settings on page 817. you can specify its appearance in rendered images.13 Select the default template. texture. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 2 Scroll down the materials list. For more details on modifying these settings. Modifying System Settings on page 809. you can select it now. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Settings on page 838. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. create and modify them as needed. During this exercise. TIP For more information about creating new materials. or refer to the online help.

See Modifying Project Settings on page 817 for more information on creating new fill patterns. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. modify the line weight. or modify existing patterns. 13 If necessary. create new line subcategories. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 18 For existing line categories. 4 Click Replace. and imported objects. 19 If necessary. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. you can set line weights. annotation objects. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. line patterns. 20 Click OK. If you change render appearance properties. Modifying Project Settings | 839 . create new subcategories. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. You can add and delete view scales. see a preview of the rendered material. You can align.3 Click the Render Appearance tab. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and move model patterns. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. For more information. and change render appearance properties. 15 Modify categories. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. line color. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. In the Object Styles dialog. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. the changes are saved as part of the project template. rotate. and scroll through the list of categories. see Specifying File Locations on page 811. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. or line pattern as needed. and materials for model objects. and create new subcategories as needed. 9 Click OK when finished. line colors.

40 Click OK. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 46 Click OK. name the style. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and radial dimensions are modified separately. select it. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. and click Edit. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 32 To modify a line pattern. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. select it from this list. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. select it from this list. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. To see the details of a particular style. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. and specify the properties. tags. and specify the properties. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 29 Click OK. angular. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 34 Click OK. and dimensions. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. click Duplicate. such as section lines and dimension lines. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed.The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. Linear. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab.

the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. and move view scales as needed. TIP In the drawing area. 64 Review the table. In the Tags dialog. click Load. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 50 To load new annotation tags. For example. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 55 Click OK. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Format. or Fine. To move the view scales. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Modifying Project Settings | 841 . View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Volume. Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 58 Click OK. Medium. click the arrows between columns. Using the arrows between the columns. and choose a decimal symbol. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. and click OK. When you create a new view. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and Angle settings. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. The detail level is based on view scale. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 53 For Length. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 62 Click OK. 57 Specify the Slope option. 65 Click OK. 60 Under Walls. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary.

or edit existing organization types. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. This could be useful for things such as hardware. Links to associated tutorials are provided. 71 Delete. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. or edit existing organization types. you can set up the phases. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. Phases Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 599 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 70 Click the Sheets tab. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. In such a case. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. rename. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 73 Click OK. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. create new browser organization types. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 834. However. If necessary. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. furniture. Use the table below as a checklist. Project Phasing on page 767 If necessary. 69 If necessary. In a typical project. Although these settings can be saved within a template. or electrical fixtures. click the Views tab. 68 Delete. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 72 If necessary. phase filters. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. For example. create new browser organization types. You can find additional information in Help.Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. rename. Each command is available on the Settings menu.

you can set the default contour line interval. you may want to delete. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 843 . click Door. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. create. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template.Settings Menu Command View Templates Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. do so before starting this exercise. Select it. and the poche depth. click Load. For example. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Depending on the intended use of this template. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You can load any family or group into a template. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. and click Open. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 695 Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. if you load every available window type. 2 In the Type Selector. If this selection is satisfactory. or use the Project Browser. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. or modify a door. modify. Although the options are endless. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. If you have not completed the previous exercise. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. you could load detail components. you can move onto the next component type. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. 3 To modify. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. there are some important thoughts to consider. create. and electrical fixtures. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. or load a new door type. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. click Bar. However. the section cut material. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. you do both. In addition. In the steps that follow. Although this is possible. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 843. or add to this selection. title blocks. Site Settings If necessary.

Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. Click Duplicate. In the Element Properties dialog. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. and click OK.) 10 Expand the title block. Enter a name. and click OK. and select the title block type. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Create new door type 4 Click OK. 9 Expand Annotation Symbols. expand Families. Modify type properties. click Edit/New. Make modifications. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. click Edit/New. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. and click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with.Goal: Modify door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that each family category is listed.

In this exercise. and click Delete. create. To do so. load. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the component. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. you create the views required for your template. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Discipline. click 12 Click Preview. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Detail Level. View Range. Modifying Views and View Templates | 845 . and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. In this exercise. In addition. This title block is currently part of the template. In addition.11 On the Options Bar. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 845. 13 Click OK. click Load. you will first modify view templates. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. To load a title block. (Element Properties). Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you created new projects using different templates.

Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. select Architectural Plan. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. and click OK. open the view from the Project Browser. and click OK. Blue level heads have associated plan views. 11 Click Apply. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. click Apply. In addition. and then click OK. double-click Site. 12 In the Project Browser. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 18 If you modified any other view templates. under Floor Plans. click Apply. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and apply the appropriate template. under Floor Plans. select Site Plan. Notice the level names. After applying the template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. Every time a new plan view is created. and double-click Level 1. double-click Level 2. you can apply a view template to any view.Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Black level heads have no associated views. At any time. 2 Under Names. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 6 Click OK. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click South. under Elevations. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 4 If necessary. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. the view is not linked to the template in any way. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs.

and modify their properties accordingly. right-click the view name. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. review the existing floor plans. 30 In the Project Browser. or delete this view. duplicate. expand 3D Views. and elevations. If you want to modify view properties. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. If it does not display. notice that you have the option to rename. 23 To add more levels to the template. or an edge of the ViewCube. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter a view name. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. right-click {3D}. You can add schedules to a template. in the Project Browser. review the floor plans. on the View toolbar. click Orient to View. (Default 3D View). under 3D Views. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. By default. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. or delete them as needed. right-click Level 1. 31 Rename the 3D View. under Floor Plans. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. To orient the 3D view to a direction. Rename. and. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. If prompted. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. Modifying Views and View Templates | 847 . The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. ceiling plans. To orient the 3D view to another view. and select the desired view. in the shortcut menu. click Orient to a Direction. 27 Create additional levels as needed. and click Properties. a face. 24 On the Options Bar. select Make Plan View. 21 In the Project Browser. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Save View. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view.20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click the ViewCube. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. duplicate. and select the desired direction. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. use the ViewCube. and click Rename. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Level.

make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Right-click the sheet name. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. modify settings as needed. 43 Proceed to the next exercise.txt for AutoCAD. select one. and click Rename. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Add View. modify settings as needed. modify settings as needed. assign filters. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. select the title block and delete it. After the sheet is created. click Sheet. and click OK. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can still add views to the sheet. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. On the Filter tab. You are prompted to select a title block. Select a view. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 40 To add views to the sheet. 42 Create new sheets as needed. 848 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 37 Click OK. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. TIP In the Export Layers dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. expand Sheets (all). Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation.35 If you want to add schedules to your template. or exportlayersdgn. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. select the category type. in the Project Browser. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. select the default title block. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. select and order required fields. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. To later add a title block to a sheet. On the Formatting tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. To do so.txt for MicroStation). TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. On the Appearance tab. and click OK. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 848.

specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. select Save As. and click Save. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. therefore. doors.2 For each category. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. name the file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. name the file. These settings are retained within the project template. When scheduling. and they become the set mappings for the project. because each office has a unique set of needs. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. click Save As. 8 In the dialog. name the file. 9 Click Save As. 5 For each category. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. for example. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 255 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 849 . you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Using shared parameters. and click Save. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and so on. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 849. This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. project parameters. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. You can save these mappings to a text file. project parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When you create a multi-category schedule. and so on. They cannot be shared with other projects. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. and click Save. For example. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. windows. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects.

and choose a shared parameter. select a group to add parameters to. 27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 5 Enter the group name. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 850 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 Name the parameter. you can create a list of parameters. under Groups. you may want to save the file to a network location. 17 Under Discipline. 8 Under Parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 16 Under Parameter Data. 14 Click Add. click New. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter a parameter name. click New. and click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 3 Name and save the file. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. If a file already exists. for Name. and specify its discipline and type. 26 Click OK. select a parameter discipline type. 11 For each parameter group. and select Shared Parameter. 2 Click Create. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. add required parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. select a parameter value type.on page 231. 10 Click OK. select Project parameter. 19 Under Group parameter under. 28 Click OK. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851. 22 Click OK. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 25 Click Select. 21 Under Categories. click Add. 23 Add project parameters as needed. For each parameter group. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 6 Create as many groups as needed.

You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 35 For Name. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. modify the printer settings. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Named Print Settings | 851 . 3 Under Settings. 32 Navigate to the directory. click Schedule/Quantities. 4 Modify the printer settings. paper placement. select a different printer. and create new settings for this printer. 37 When you have completed the schedule. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. click OK. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. The tag is now part of the template. 5 Click Save As. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. make minor modifications if necessary. save the file as a template. or refer to the online help. enter a name for the schedule. and click OK. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. enter a new name for the printer. For each printer. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. For information on creating multi-category tags. click Setup. click Save as. you need only select a setting. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. By creating named settings within the template. By going first to the Print command. and print. and click Open. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. and click OK. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. for Name. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 6 In the New dialog. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. Create additional settings as needed. and the percent of actual size. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you create named print settings. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. In this exercise. and make it your default template file. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Click OK. select the tag. 2 Under Printer.29 Add shared project parameters as needed. 34 For Category. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 9 In the Print dialog. click Setup. you can load them into the template. select Multi-Category. Creating Named Print Settings on page 851.

and navigate to the location where you saved the template. If you have a project. 20 Click OK. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. By investing the time to individualize your template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. select Template Files (*. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse.10 Repeat these steps as needed. This can provide a good starting point for a template. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. The only remaining task is to save it. you ensure that office standards are maintained. You can also set this template as your default template. and click Open.rte). select it. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 24 Navigate to the template location. you modified settings. 23 For Default template file. 11 Click Close when finished. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 15 Name the template. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. In this lesson. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and click Save. 852 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. loaded components. 14 Under Save as type. In addition. Your template is complete. 25 Click OK. and click Open. and saved them to a template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 19 Select the template. 18 Click Browse. save it in a network location. In addition. If you need to share this file with others.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful